Home

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual

1. 1756 OB8El Simplified Schematic 5V b y DC 0 pco fey 1 ab ouro solate IA p 2 Wiring RTN OUT 0 3 DH w Yark f 7 Der T8 s JDP our tI AA OUT 0 RTN OUT 1 D 7 B our4 Y pe 2 Ji 9 OUT 2 l ela aa Ay STL L L RIN 0UTL2 enn OUT 2 4 TOUT DC3 E 4 13 E ours OUT 0 N Mon Y D RTN OUT 3 nine 15 CD QUT 3 l Display Output RTN peau eie vi eL oura ControlLogix Backplane Interface Device OUT 0 Nonisolated Rouma Dj 19 EDT ours iring A e _ C5 4 Alz 21 4 OUT 5 aM RINOUTS ep z 0UT 5 e _ DC 6 Cp 25 OUT 6 l Daisy Chain t Surge Current Chart patsy gem fi RRs es z nip 5 a e DOH TIS 29 CD UU 4 e m urge mov TS s EDT HU S a Daisy Chain to Not Used Cp 33 D Not Used Other RTBs Not Used CD 36 35 D Not Used Continuous 60 C 140 F g 2A 2 m 0 10 ms Time DC COM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 155 Chapter 8 Wiring Diagrams 45V Simplified Schematic Y Display ControlLogi
2. 1756 1V32 C m S tle M0 EN N3 Ea E N2 o N5 P s 5 N 4 N7 ge 7 N 6 Group 0 N9 o o og N 8 N 11 a 12 11 4 N 10 N13 T amp D 4 1314 N 12 N 15 AP 16 15 4 N 14 DC 0 4 18 17 amp DC 0 4 INTL T8520 19 N 16 N 19 Qz ag N 18 d s N 21 Cp 23 N 20 N 23 g 25 N 22 N 25 Cp 2s 27 N 24 N 27 8 30 29 N 26 Group 1 N 29 D z 31 N 28 N 31 a 34 33 C N 30 DC 1 G 36 35 DC 1 4 T DC CO Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Simplified Schematic Control A Display Logix Backplane Interface Surge Current Chart Surge Current NA A lL 43ms 1756 0A8 OUT 0 Other RTBs Daisy Chain to L1 0 L1 0 L1 0 L1 0 L1 0 L1 1 L1 1 L1 1 L1 1 L1 1 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module 1756 0A8 oo CB G3 92 ED 92 EB D D B D CE E 9 E KD EB ED EB E D Rockwell Automation Pub
3. Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0C8 DC 0 gt f i EH v ij se TED e L p OUT 0 i CE 2 DC 0 4 129 f OUT 1 amp A RTN QUT O bini AD KD SURG M SI ur DC 0 JL I OUT 2 aie I ControlLogix Backplane Interface DE Ies IGS ours 10 9 Display RTN OUT 0 Ie ee RTN OUT 0 cmm 1 DC 1 ee ee OUT 4 Surge Current Chart ini 3 DC 1 4 D Id OUT 5 Group 1 16 Group 1 aa Sutge DC 1 4 ic ie OUT 6 1 7 sus EDD om E ontinuous 60 C 140 F P P 2 2A reum Ne f RTN OUT 1 DID mom CN Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 0 10 ms Time 166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0016 ControlLogix TTL output module Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 0G16 1756 0G16 eis 1 DC Power Wire l 3 RV DC le
4. 1492 IFMs for Digital I O Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 IA8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F FS120A 4 Fusible Two 4 point isolated groups with four terminals per input and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 1A16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators H 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F F120A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse status indicators 1756 1A161 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS120A 4 Fusible Isolated with 120 V AC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Isol
5. 1756 OH8I Isolated Wiring 2 114 OUTO D4 s OUT 0 pc1 9 Tele s OUT 1 J RTN OUT 1 es 7 OUT 1 Lo oew 9 E our L b Rmo 9 r n EDT ou A v DC 3 IG 14 13 4 OUT 3 Non Isolated RTN OUT 3 119 15 8 OUT 3 Wiring r DCA LU 18 17 OUT 4 V c RINOUTA4 20 19 OUT 4 amp oes las aT ours 4 Daisy 9 7 RTN OUT 5 24 23 OUT 5 1 chainto DC6 9 26 25 OUT 6 Ny e th RTB RINOUT6 Qiz 278 OUT 6 R DOH D ao 29 OUT 7 amp RIN OUT E 22 nig OUT 7 S Not used 34 33 CD Not used aisy chainto Nor used CD 36 35 CD Notused other RTBs L sh DCCOM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 0N8 ControlLogix AC 10 30V output module Simplified Schematic Current L1 0 OUT 0 ontrolLogix Backplane Interface Display Surge Current Chart 20A Surge 2A Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 ON8 gt Jl U Jong ji up CB GED Ep GD G2 GD E9 GD Eo eaa a Wiring Diagrams OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 Not Used OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Not Used Chapter 8 L2 0 43 ms
6. Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 137 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 IB16 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IB16 E CDS ES o poe IN 0 Group 0 ui j REB ED GND 0 VE Daisy Chain Im lt 1 4 A T 7 N IN 4 roup C 2 lt oe N 5 Kp o GND i TH ES TB m Controllogix Display n T7 Backplane GND 0 i ie GND 0 Interface n gt EB EB Leere IN 11 m Ies IN 10 Group 1 IN 13 IES K i IN 12 Group 1 ias HEB HES ow HED HES DC COM 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 1B16D ControlLogix DC 10 30V diagnostic input module Simplified Schematic Input 5V ControlLogix Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Vaada IN 0 i o Backplane c ol eno S2 No E u Interface Display wW Ta s EDT ina P t VV T t l Group 0 GND 8 EN N2 TT i VE endo Fri E M 1 PH GND g CDI IN4 GND 0 Ki T P i E Group 1 GND K Kj N5 F 3 n eno gw pp we Co 54d 1 i GND TE t6 15 251 IN 7 GND GND2 TE 18 171 Ns i GND2 Ea E Ng Open Wire E
7. 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1756 0A8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs gth 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS240 4 Isolated with four terminals with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 0A8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals p
8. Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size4 Size 5 1756 0161 16 15 30 C 86 F 13 30 C 86 F 8 30 C 86 F 5 9 30 C 86 F 12 60 C 140 F 10 60 C 140 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 60 C 140 F 1756 0A16 16 14 only 7 per group 4 None None Only 2 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30 C 86 F 5 30 C 86 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 9 60 C 140 F 1756 0A8D 8 8 8 None None 1756 0A8E 8 8 8 6 only 3 per group 6 30 C 86 F only 3 per group 4 9 60 C 140 F only 2 per group Table 62 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 230V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size4 Size 5 1756 0A161 16 16 16 16 30 C 86 F 11 30 C 86 F 13 60 C 140 F 9 60 C 140 F 1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 only 2 per group 2 only 1 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8 Table 63 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 24V AC 60 Hz Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 1756 0N8 4 30 C 86 F 4 30 C 86 F None None None 3 60 C 140 F 3 60 C 140 F Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 233 AppendixE Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 64 Number of Motor Starters to be Used Step 1 Choose your motor starter Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by any 1756 digital I O modul
9. Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection Data percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the Output Data Data or Scheduled Pt x PWMEnable tag per Module 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default or 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by Connection Data staggering On transitions for outputs Otherwise outputs turn On immediately at the start Output Data Data or Scheduled of a cycle Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag per Module 0 Does not stagger output On transitions default Outputs turn On immediately when or the Pt x Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge Connection Peer Ownership 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering turn On at Output Data Data with Peer different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became energized P simultaneously Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse Connection Data cycles occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns
10. 40201 M 4 Turn the terminal screw clockwise until the wire is secured The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie Spring Clamp Follow these steps to wire a spring clamp 1 Strip 11 mm 7 16 in maximum length of wire 2 Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB to depress the spring loaded clamp 3 Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver Strain Relief Area 20860 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 113 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules IMPORTANT Makesurethe wire and notthe screwdriver is inserted into the open terminal to prevent damage to the module The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie RTB Wiring Recommendations Consider these guidelines when wiring your RTB e Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up e Usea tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB s A jumper bar is shipped with certain I O modules to assist in installation For an example of when to use the jumper bar see the 1756 IA 16 wiring diagram Extra jumper bars can be purchased by ordering catalog number 1756 JMPR e For applications that require heavy gauge wiring order and use an extend
11. A communication fault sets all 32 bits in the Module Fault word Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 103 Chapter 5 Fast Module Features Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 104 Module Fault Word Fuse Blown Tag Bit 31 ControlLogix fast digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller Like input modules output modules maintain a Module Fault word the highest level of fault reporting However output modules use an additional word to indicate a fault condition Table 24 lists the fault word and the associated tag you can examine in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a fast output module Table 24 Fault Words on Fast Output Modules Word InputTag Name Description Module Fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OBIGIEF module has a Module Fault word of 32 bits But because the module is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits 0 15 are used in the Module Fault word Bits set in the FuseBlown tag are logically entered into the Module Fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 25 Bits Set in
12. ocas ControlNet Network 41021 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 25 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Module Operation 26 Suggestions for Rack optimized Connections We recommend that you use a rack optimized connection for these applications s Standard digital I O modules e Non fused digital output modules e Owner controllers running low on connections IMPORTANT Rack optimized connections are available only to digital 1 0 modules However do not use a rack optimized connection for diagnostic 1 0 modules or fused output modules Diagnostic and fused output data is not transferred over arack optimized connection This defeats the purpose of using those modules In traditional I O systems controllers poll input modules to obtain their input status In the ControlLogix system a controller does not poll digital input modules Instead the modules multicast their data either upon change of state COS or requested packet interval RPI The frequency depends on the options chosen during configuration and whether the input module is local or remote This method of communication uses the Producer Consumer model The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer of the data All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronously in relation to the controller
13. 71 Field Wiring OpBOlSs sedes Cel eie uA to Ld Mods eet 71 ING Load Detection outer saa r Z Ta E E T X ps 71 Field side Output Verification ui eee e 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Table of Contents Pulse Test 5 eoa tee On qo aati tae RR Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers se Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers se Chapter 5 Fast Input Module Compatibility 52 i229 2 ERR vere Fast Output Module Compatibility see e Fast BedEUIes vues vie E ovi sit oc uci wale acts use ue af Mtl ictu td d Response Times exu duce Du re RO TEH R N MEE dede Features Specific to Fast Input Modules ee Pubs ape corio ce tuni Ya EAR ian atrae hend Per Point Timestamping and Change of State LL Software Configurable Filter Times Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks lssse eee e es Features Specific to Fast Output Modules 00s eee eee Programmable Fault State Delays ic ie eee eret then Pulse Width Modulation ccc IEEE EU EU A dena pews Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers ss Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 225 2r EEI paved eres ERIS Chapter 6 Tassallthie Modules conduct
14. O a Da Oy d c au R Dy CN a I TT 73 FD Fco 00 ED 0 00 5 m Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 OUT 0 OUT 1 N O OUT 2 N O OUT 3 N O OUT 4 N O OUT 5 N O OUT 6 N O OUT 7 N O OUT 8 N O OUT 9 N 0 OUT 10 N O OUT 11 N O OUT 12 N O OUT 13 N O OUT 14 N O OUT 15 N O Not Used Not Used o 20 ou2 onra 2 1756 0X81l Wiring Diagrams ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 125V isolated contact module Simplified Schematic Loa to L1 0 Isolated Wiring L1 0 O ControlLogix Od r gt RA SX DC26 O L Backplane i 9 5 NE Interface 5 0v OUT 0 N C EN P a CES EE Jumper Bar Cut to Length OUT 0 N O Part number 97739201 Display Nonisolated L Wiring L Additional jumper bars may be purchased L by using catalog number 1756 JMPR L L1 O L lt NotUse TL hh d amp dkbdbakbk Kd dadah LL d d 1756 0X8l p 2 A Xd o o K T 10 m G 12 14 16 m u KR 18 m 20 22 TJ K 24 26 LN T 28 30 32 34 36 y Daisy Chain to Other RT
15. Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 65 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Table 9 1756 0A8D Point level Fault Scenarios Ladder commands output to be On 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 8 Point AC 16 Point DC Diagnostic I O modules provide various grouping of points on different modules The eight point AC modules and 16 point DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications The greater number of Point level Fault Reporting points lets more field devices be attached to I O modules to boost efficiency Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a fault bits Table 8 Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 Points Input Points These conditions can set a fault bit for an input point e Open wire Field power loss 1756 IA8D only point by point basis The following fault conditions generate their own unique Output Points These conditions can set a fault bit for an output point e Fuse blown Noload e Output verify Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a pulse test can help to further isolate the fault Table 9 lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module Ladder commands output to be Off 1 2 Pulse Test fails Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as oft Possible cause of
16. Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Additional jumper bars may be purchased 0 10 ms Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 163 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B161S ControlLogix DC 10 30V scheduled isolated output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0B16IS Isolated Wiring Isolated Sourcing Output Wiring DC 0 o DC 0 2 18 OUT 0 DC 0 DG Ld Hea spp Our 5V DC 2 o DC 2 ple s OUT2 o DC2 l DC 3 ge 7g OUT 3 7 yas DC 4 CD eg OUT 4 S Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 y n OUTS DC 6 o _ DC6 cpi sep OUT 6 o DC6 J ControlLogix Backplane Interface DC 7 16 i58 OUT 7 Jumper Bar DC 8 18 17 OUT 8 Display Cut to Length DC 8 D 2 191 OUT 9 Nonisolated DC 10 T6522 2 OUT 10 Sourcing DC 11 9 FS g OUT 11 Output Surge Current Chart Kan DC 12 4 S b OUT 12 Wiring Tm j oc136 Heas E Ours AA DC 14 E30 29 OUT 14 DC 15 aa 31 OUT 15 d DC O DC 15 E ss Not Used Continuous 30 C 86 F y Not Used as 3s Not Used E DCI Continuous 60 C 14
17. o d0 o DC3 4 N7 oo o DC DC 145 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 IM16l ControlLogix AC 159 265V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IM161 Isolated Wiring E 5V 120 o 120 Q 2 114 ba l 2 L2 1 al 3p C 2 y T f pro 122 o 122 ges s rud P 3 A 4 L2 3 gie 7g C 2 AN i l bro lee EA E L2 5 22 ud 7 L2 6 qu Bg Controllogix Display Jumper Bar L27 Taye 5D Backplane Cut to Length L2 8 epe 17 Interface 29 cop 19 6 12 10 gz ag L2 11 gz zd irc L2 12 pj26 25 12 13 g Additional jumper bars may be purchased 214 B S ki by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Gas Zia a Z 2 O 0245 g 33 6D F i Not Used gle ss CD S Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 IN16 ControlLogix AC 10 30V input module 8 P Simplified Schematic 1756 IN16 IN 0 5V C gt T V pa o L2 0 en gt YEK U K D i GND 2 Controllogix Display Backplane Interface Group 1 N 13 N 15 L2 1 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 IN 0 EN L1 0 IN 1 N2 o 6 o l2 IN 3 N 4 o o o L4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 IN 9 N 10 oJ
18. If the diagnostic change of state feature is enabled a diagnostic input module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in the table occurs Event Description RPI A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of State Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data is sent at the RPI rate where there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Diagnostic Change of State Occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Information updates when any change in the diagnostics for an input module 67 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Although the RPI occurs continuously the COS feature lets you to decide whether changes in a module s diagnostic detection cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane On gt Off T Open Wire Iv Iv Iv E r Li r T Kaia a ian TSISII YT IKR a4 a o oa Aa Aa T ESERIES v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline C
19. Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done lIndicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection Data Pt x PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 The PWM cycle limit has not yet been reached The bit resets to 0 each time the output per Module transitions to On to begin a new PWM cycle or 1 The PWM cycle limit has been reached Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tIndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data time master on the backplane Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 CIP Sync is not available per Module 1 CIP Sync is available or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout lIndicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 A valid time master has not timed out per Module 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed or out The module is currently using its local clock Co
20. Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Common Features The table below lists features common to all ControlLogix digital I O modules Wpi Page Removal and Insertion Under Power 39 Module Fault Reporting 39 Software Configurable 40 Electronic Keying 40 Module Inhibiting 41 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 42 Producer Consumer Communication 46 Status Indicator Information 46 Removal and Insertion Under Power All ControlLogix 1 O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature enables greater availability of the overall control system While the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the control process This helps prevent an entire production line from having to be shut down Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s fault status indicator and RSLogix 5000 software graphically displays this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action to take to resume normal operation The 1756 OB16IEF module extends this feature by enabling you to define the duration of time before the module transitions to On or Off after a fault occurs Fo
21. 147 91 mm 5 823 in e Extended depth housing 157 43 mm 6 198 in Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 117 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Install the Removable Terminal Block 118 This section shows how to install the RTB onto the module to connect the wiring A A WARNING When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field side power is applied the RTB is electrically live Do not touch the RTB5 terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before installing the RTB onto the module Before installing the RTB make certain ofthe following e Field side wiring of the RTB has been completed e RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB s RTB housing door is closed e The locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked 1 Align the top bottom a
22. S scheduled output data fast 1 0 modules 44 129 222 standard and diagnostic modules 42 220 Scheduled Output Data communication format 129 specifications 12 spring damp RTB 113 status indicators 16 46 status reporting diagnostic input modules 75 output modules 77 fast 253 Index input modules 103 trigger output modules 104 event task 28 89 90 standard troubleshooting input modules 60 output modules 61 Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment 11 W Studio 5000 Logix Designer application 11 module status indicators 16 46 wiring connections extended depth housing 116 T field wiring options 52 71 interface module 14 task event 28 89 90 isolated and non isolated modules 49 timestamps recommendations for wiring RTB 114 CIP Sync 44 200 207 222 removable terminal block 14 110 CST 42 220 diagnostic 65 latch 85 tips conserving ControlNet bandwidth 28 listen only communication format 127 pulse test 74 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical informat
23. TED a6 as cD Not Used 1A E N Additional jumper bars may be purchased Daisy Chain to Other RTBs by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 153 Chapter 8 154 ControlLogix DC 10 30V output module Current Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B8 Simplified Schematic DC 0 5V 2 OUT 0 t 2 VO T 2 ControlLogix Backplane Interface li OUT 0 Display Surge Current Chart Surge 4A Continuous 60 C 140 F 2A SE a 0 10 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs E DC 0 Group 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 RTN OU DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 RTN OU T 0 T1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 0B8 N 4 WS WE EA HD a ooe d ep C9 69 SS CB M SZ Se ws SY NU D Daisy Chain Other RTBs COM Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0B8EI ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused isolated output module
24. is RE PISICISISISISISIeIS GH D EB ED 07 KP ror l zl CE E D Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 143 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1616 ControlLogix TTL input module Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 IG16 1756 1616 DC C 1 0 Wire i EGG FD IN AC IAS TAS Ne Fie a 0 jJ 2 did Wa aie S N 3 HOD AGS 2 H IES LE N L SV DC CD e ns ACOA INA e TAS TAA gE ge 1 0 Wire T CD ED N2 HGS iN mG Ta Ie L DC Power Wire ND BNIL l KUR T pe ot ED IED oc como i DC Had me pM HN DE E f m B mm 9 Z i IN 8 cl au uai fe ETT T Device TAS HI n g d Capacitor 11 B 125 IN 10 5V DC Power wera ASTD uus 0 01 pF Typical T TN See notes below 13 ID dp IN 12 Nas TIED TIED luu 1 9 NU Hg g CD SE INA HO Has d Us DC 4 4 GB Ge DC COM 1 DC 16 ED ia DC COM 1 C f Simplified Schemati
25. owner controller l Module Properties Local 1 1756 1416 3 1 xj General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI poo ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Cancel Help Follow these steps to set an RPI value 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Connection tab 2 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI field enter an RPI value 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 47 Chapter3 Common Module Features Enable Change of State The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set whether a COS occurs when a field device transitions from Off to On or On to Off Follow these steps to enable or disable COS 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 1A16 3 1 General Connection Module Info Backplane Input Filter Time Off gt On On gt Off 8 15 1ms v 8ms lt NISI SII 9 F F Lr Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Doone of the following in the Enable Change of State columns e To enable COS for a point check the corresponding Off to On or On to Off checkbox e To disable COS fora point clear the corresponding Off to On or On to Off checkbox 3 Click OK 48 Rockwell Automation Publicatio
26. 0 30 000 ps or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x FilterEn BOOL Filter lIf enabled for a point input transitions must remain in the new state for a Connection Data configured length of time before the module considers the transition valid For more Input Data Data or Timestamp Data information see page 86 Ur 0 Filtering s disabled Connection Data with Event 1 Filtering is enabled Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x COSOffOnEn BOOL Change of State Off to On If enabled for a point an Off to On transition triggers a Connection Data timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane For more information see Input Data Data or Timestamp Data page 48 or 0 COS data is not produced upon an Off to On transition Connection Data with Event 1 COS data is produced upon an Off to On transition Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x COSOnOffEn BOOL Change of State On to Off lIf enabled for a point an On to Off transition triggers a Connection Data timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane For more information see page 48 0 COS data is not produced upon an On to Off transition 1 COS data is produced upon an On to Off transition Table 44 1756 IB16IF Module Input Tags Input Data Data or Timestamp Data or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Name DataType Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Faul
27. 1 Fault FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short circuit condition for an output point All 1 bit per point FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault NoLoad DINT No Load Diagnostic that indicates the absence of a load such as the wire is disconnected from the module This 1 bit per group diagnostic operates only in the Off state 0 No fault 1 Fault OutputVerifyFault DINT Output Verify Diagnostic that indicates that the input has been commanded to the On state but the output has not 1 bit per point been verified to be On Table 42 Diagnostic Outp Name CSTTimestamp 8 bytes Data 1 bit per point 186 ut Module Output Da Data Type DINT 2 DINT 0 No fault 1 Fault output is not On ta Tags Definition Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Output Status Status for the output point originating from the controller 0 Off 1 0n Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Tag Definitions Appendix B Fast Input Module Tags The ControlLogix 1756 IB16IF fast input module has four types of tags s Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I
28. Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI 20 0 ms 0 2 750 0 ms C Inhibit Module C Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline 2 Complete the fields as described below and click OK Field Description Requested Packet Interval RPI Enter an RPI value or use the default See RPI in Chapter 2 for more information Inhibit module Check the box to prevent communication between the owner controller and the module This option enables maintenance of the module without faults being reported to the controller See Module Inhibiting in Chapter 3 for more information Major fault On Controller If Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the Connection Fails While in Run Mode module while in Run mode For important information on this checkbox see the Logix5000 Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual publication 1756 PM015 Module Fault The fault box is empty if you are offline The type of connection fault appears in the text box if a fault occurs when the module is online Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 131 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules View and Change When you create a module a set of tags is created by the ControlLogix system Module Taas that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix 5000 software Each configured g feature o
29. Connection Module Info Output State PWM Configuration Diagnostics Time Sync Points Copy PWM Configuration Pulse Width Modulation v Enable Pulse Width Modulation PWM PWM On Time 0 0000 PWM Cycle Time 0 0000 PWM On Time and PWM Cycle Time are defined in the Output Tag for this module Minimum On Time 0 0000 Seconds C Extend Cycle to Accomodate Minimum On Time C Stagger Output to Adjust Cycle Phase to Minimize Simultaneous Outputs On Time in Seconds Percent Enable Cycle Limit Cycle Limit Status Offline Cancel l arek Heb 3 In the Points area click a numbered button to configure the corresponding output point 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Field Enable Pulse Width Modulation PWM Fast Module Features Chapter 5 In the Pulse Width Modulation area complete the fields as described in the table below Description Check the checkbox to enable PWM If this checkbox is cleared all other PWM fields are unavailable and the PWM On time and cycle time for the point are ignored By default PWM is disabled 1756 0B16IEF Tag Name CPt x PWMEnable 1756 0B16IEFS Tag Name CPWM Enable PWM On Time view only Displays the length of time that a pulse is active as defined in the PWMOnTime output tag By default this value is defined in seconds with a range of 0 0002 3600 0 How
30. ControlLogix Backplane Interface E oues TIED ICD ove 16 15 OUT 13 OUT 12 Group KD ICD Surge Current Chart E u Group 1 oras MEDIE oua s PerG aS TH urge er Grou U H 20A L L i i L2 E T Per Group CN Z 2 500mA ER 0 43 ms Time 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0A161 ControlLogix AC 74 265V isolated output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A161 Isolated Wiring RA KE CNN TN L1 0 T A 1 0 O uo 5 11652 outo O 12 0 i 1 L1 1 TT oA oum 1 A l F ELA 1 2 Q 42 s e OUT2 O 122 E Us L3 ep epis ours E Ay UA Q LUA glo 917 OUT 4 O 12 4 LA d UUT 0 L1 5 emu 11 OUT 5 Y 3 B ControlLogix Backplane Interface 1 6 eM OUT6 L1 7 cpi 15 OUT 7 L Displa Dm Jumper Bar Cut to Length L1 8 D 18 171 OUT 8 L1 20 G UT Surge Current Chart En S S M E l s g jE e Nonisolated Min ED a 23 G 20A Wiring L1 12 G 26 25 q OUT 12 Lap L1 13 G 28 27 OUT 13 L1 14 G 30 29 4 OUT 14 5 115 TED 2 31 OUT 15 e 3 Ui SEGUE HO RT plo s 8 Not Used ontinuous L 2A P NotUsed
31. The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94 9 EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079 15 and EN 60079 0 WARNING A A ATTENTION This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation e This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments e This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation e Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments e This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified Rockwell Automation backplanes e Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install Contro
32. This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffsetin Point the controller s TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the module ScheduleTimestamp DINT Schedule Timestamp The baseline CIP Sync time for all schedules The module uses Connection Data the baseline CIP Sync time combined with the offset value in the Schedule Offset tag to Output Data Scheduled per calculate the absolute time a physical output turns On or Off Point Schedule x ID SINT Schedule ID ldentifies which schedule to apply to an output point Connection Data Valid schedules 1 32 Output Data Scheduled per 0 No schedule Point Schedule x SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number Indicates the sequence count received with a schedule Connection Data The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in sequence number Output Data Scheduled per The first message received initializes the schedule Point Schedule x OutputPointSelect SINT Schedule Output Point Indicates which physical output point is associated with a Connection Data schedule The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in output Output Data Scheduled per point Point The first message received initializes the schedule Valid values 0 15 Schedule x Data SINT Schedule Data lIndicates the On Off state to apply to an output point at the scheduled Connection Data time
33. e at the left side of the rung IEEE M lessage Message Control 3 Find then click MSG message instruction on the instruction toolbar The MSG icon is among the formats on the Input Output tab of the instruction toolbar You also can drag and drop an instruction icon onto a rung A green dot appears when a valid location is detected for the instruction on the rung Inside the message box in the Message Control field right click che question mark to access a pull down menu MSG Message Messane Control E Cut Instruction Copy Instruction S el Paste CS Ctrl C Ctrl Delete Instruction Add adder Flamant Del IEAI Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 213 AppendixC X Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration 5 Choose New Tag The New Tag dialog box appears with the cursor in the Name field IMPORTANT We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service the message instruction is sending For example if a message instruction is to reset an electronic fuse then name the tag reset fuse to reflect this ES Name teta cho R eset Fuse K Description Type Base Usage normal Cancel t Help Alias For Data Type MESSAGE i Scope fa L53 New Controller T x Style 7 T Constant Open MESSAGE Configuration 6 Complete the fields on t
34. e Forexample in version 9 00 00 or earlier depending on the Message Type you are required to configure some combination of the following Service Code Object Type Object ID Object Attribute Source Number of Elements Destination e n version 10 07 00 or later after you choose a Service Type RSLogix 5000 software fills in most ofthe fields listed above The fields you must fill in are dependent on what Service Type you choose For example with the Reset Electronic Fuse service you must know only the Source Element and the Destination The following section shows how to configure messages with RSLogix 5000 Software version 10 07 00 or later A table describes the relationship of the fields in both dialog boxes so you can configure messages by using RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 215 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Configuration Tab The Configuration tab provides information on what module service to perform and where to perform it RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier RSLogix 5000 Software Version 10 07 00 or Later Message Configuration Slot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse Dj e x Configuration Communication Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic z Message Type op Generic x 1 Sewice Reset Electronic Fuse m Seuree Element Slot4_ChO_Reset_F
35. global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes a inspection par les autorit s locales qualifi es au moment de l installation WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD e Donot disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous e Donot disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous European Hazardous Location Approval WARNING RISQUE D EXPLOSION e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s cet quipement l aide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substitution de composants peut rendre cet quipement inadapt une utilisation en environnement de Classe Division 2 e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de changer les piles
36. 0 Off 1 0n Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Scheduled per Point 207 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 54 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Schedule x 0ffset DINT Schedule Offset Indicates a schedule s offset value to be added to the baseline Connection Data ScheduleTimestamp value to determine the absolute time at which a physical output turns Output Data Scheduled per On or Off Point The offset value must be 35 minutes from the baseline ScheduleTimestamp value PWM CydeTime REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the PWM Enable configuration tag Output Data Scheduled per Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Point PWM OnTime REAL PWM On Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data enabled via the PWM Enable configuration tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 0 percent Table 55 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Tags Data Output Output Data Scheduled per Point Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x Data BOOL Data lIndicates the On Off state to apply to a nonscheduled output point Connection Data 0 Off Output Data Data 1 0n Pt x ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown
37. 1756 0N8 169 1756 132 148 1756 0V16E 170 1756 048 149 1756 0V32E 171 1756 0A8D 150 1756 0W16l 12 1756 0A8E 151 1756 0X8l 173 1756 0416 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 111 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules RTB Types There are three types of RTBs e Cage Clamp catalog number 1756 TBCH e NEMA Clamp catalog number 1756 TBNH e Spring Clamp catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H Each RTP comes with housing Wire the RTB with a 3 2 mm 1 8 in maximum screwdriver before installing it onto the module Cage Clamp Follow these steps to wire a cage clamp 1 Strip 9 5 mm 3 8 in maximum length of wire 2 Insert the wire into the open terminal on the side 3 Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire T D C Strain Relief Area 20859 M The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 NEMA Clamp Follow these steps to wire a NEMA clamp 1 Strip 8 mm 5 16 in maximum length of wire 2 Turn the terminal screw counterclockwise 3 Insert the stripped end of the wire under the plate on the terminal Tec DE E AA D Di gl Strain Relief Area
38. 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 4 Diagnostic Module Features Topic Page Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 63 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 64 Diagnostic Features 64 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 67 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 7 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 75 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 77 Diagnostic modules provide additional reporting information to the controller such as a timestamp of the time a module fault occurs or clears no load detection and pulse tests The table lists the available diagnostic digital I O modules Cat No Description 1756 IA8D 79 132V AC8 point diagnostic input module 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC8 point diagnostic output module 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module Diagnostic Input When designing systems with ControlLogix diagnostic input modules consider Module Compatibility these factors e Voltage necessary for your application e Current leakage e Whether you need a solid state device e Whether your application needs to use sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 63 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility Diagnostic Features 64 ControlLogix diagnostic output modules are capable o
39. 2 module The 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 and 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 modules and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 0B16D module However due to the 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 and 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 modules blown fuse leakage current rating the no load diagnostic function of the 1756 0B16D module does not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a no load condition If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 module Expandable to 16 by using a XIM24 8R or XIMF 24 2 module Do not use this module in Output Sinking mode with fused IFM modules The IFM module fuses do not properly protect the circuit One 1492 XIM24 16RF module is to be used with one 1492 XIM4024 16R or 1492 XIM4024 16RF master 32 pt only Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 245 AppendixG 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules The following tables describe the prewired module ready cables and connectors available for your ControlLogix digital I O modules Table 66 Module Ready Cables Cat No 1492 CABLExU No of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter RTB at the 1 0 Module End 20 0 326 mm 22 AWG 9 0 mm 0 36 in 1756 TBNH 1492 CABLExV 1492 CABLEXW 1492 CABLExX 1492 CABLExY 40 11 7 mm 0 46 in 1756 TBCH 1492 CABLExZ 050 5 m Build to order cable Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m To order insert t
40. 27 Warning Signal on Main Screen F e ER View Search Loge Comeunatons Toos Window Hep aisle 5 xime gt zeli ivi Isl RL ka Po LA 3p lele el 2 9 1756 Backplane 1756 4 Pl 5 1756 HSC hsc m fa 8 1756 L63 myhsc 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A As shown in Figure 28 major and minor faults are listed on the Module Info tab in the Status section Figure 28 Fault Message in Status Line lil Module Properties Local 5 1756 HSC 1 1 General Connection Counter Configuration Dutput Configuration Backplane Identification r Status Vendor Allen Bradley Major Fault None Product Type Specialty 1 0 Minor Fault None Product Code 1756 HSC Internal State Program mode Revision 1 6 Integer Config Serial Number 80206D0C Configured Yes Product Name 1756 HSC A Ver 1 6 Owned Yes Module Identity Match Coordinated System Time CST Timer Hardware Ok Timer Sync ed No Refresh Reset Module As shown in Figure 29 the Value field displays 65535 to indicate the module connection has been broken Figure 29 Notification in Tag Editor Scope f myhse v Show ShowAl AB 1756 HSCCO AB 1756_HSC 0 DNT DINTIZ Uan DN Decimal SINT Decimal SINT Decimal SINT Fault Type Determination When you are monitoring a module s configuration properties in RSLo
41. 4 kHz IMPORTANT Timestamping functions only in a CIP Sync system If you are using change of State COS in a system using Coordinated System Time CST all timestamp values and the GrandMasterClockID input tag are set to zero To set up CIP Synctime synchronization on the local controller use the Date Time tab in the controller properties For more information about CIP Sync configuration refer to the Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication IA ATO03 You can configure an input point to record a timestamp when the point transitions from On to Off Off to On or in both directions By default all points are configured to record a timestamp in both directions You can also configure the module to latch timestamps for an input point last transition When latching is enabled for a specific point the point records a timestamp in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn or Pt x Timestamp OnOff input tags The timestamp remains latched and no new timestamps are recorded for the input point until the timestamp is acknowledged and reset As a result you can use the timestamp to determine the speed of a transition that is too fast to be detected by the program scan To acknowledge a transition and reset a timestamp latch you set the corresponding bit in these output tags s Pc x NewDataOffOnAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an On state and resets the timestamp latch s Pc x N
42. A d e L OUT 1 ED re OUT 0 D Power bs 0UTA I E IES outo T IH U apr 4 voc t D FS ED TED our L 4 our3 IES IEB Jourz OUT 5 il i UT t i tO KD KD SUP ours IES IEB jours OUT 7 OUT 6 1 O KD KD ing ourz CO O jours e DC 0 DC UE ep oe como L wad C5 TS ne como t our IlI ours E AN T WI rU ours IE CD jours 4 I I g nj OUF11 ED IED OUT 10 Output T TT i 2 Device OUT 11 Blige OUT 10 OUT 13 ig a QUT 12 Capacitor ISS iS z 0 01 uF Typical OUT 13 OUT 12 OUT 15 ee D OUT 14 See notes below aud 4 ick De i TGS GB Dc com 1 L gt UT DC 1 4 ES RES DC COM 1 CN T T CN Simplified Schematic e e lt J 5DC V K TACTA FAS D gt Si 6 lt our e TS AM ep e V K i TAAC14 UA lt l our 6 6 pc CON Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 167 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0H81l ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated output module Simplified Schematic DC 0 5V o p OUT 0 V 2 2 d RTN M IC ay OUT 0 2 ontrolLogix Backplane Interface Display Surge Current Chart 4A Surge t Continuous 60 C 140 F v E 2A w ec y 0 f 10 ms Time 168
43. Connected via the ControlNet Network 2 ose dL seve ee ee Eid Remote Output Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network ois 52 2399 dux E e EEEISS te Listen only Mod er neninn tans Un c E aetna tu pim Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules Configuration Changes in an Input Module with yere erg T Chapter 3 Input Module Compatibility sse Output Module Compatibility see cR lera ente Renee Common CALNE CG at clad oct px AR PVP ei Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table of Contents Diagnostic Module Features Removal and Insertion Under Dower sese ee eee 39 Module Fault Reporting ss seva Geol rode til trente PUR VES eae 39 Software Contgotable e 40 Electzonie Keying meote eoe imate vo E Eo Ur Se KITE 40 Module Inhibiting os evdes hes Seqintiutenut uu dua RP RO FRE HEER 4 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Oni gate ci oo oec tered R R atelier dues 42 Producer Consumer Communication xe e e e e eee 46 Status Indicator Information ccc sesso E P Xe X eo ted bsp 46 Common Features Specific to Input Modules eee 0005 46 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Chahge OP SUA CCH ete epe biased ud arara tas tuat eiaa 47 Set RPD 22s CO esed o ERE EE EA ere re EE ede 47 Enable Change of Rate 48 Software Configurable Filter Times eios eeu et Een 49 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules 49 Multiple Input Point D
44. Connection to initiate event tasks See page 89 Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Data Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 1A8D 1756 IB16D Module 1756 IB16IF Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 The tables below describe the communication and connection formats available for output modules Table 28 Output Module Communication Formats Communication Format Data Return Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data Scheduled Output Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Rack Optimization The owner controller sends all digital output words to the remote chassis as a single rack image Listen Only Output Data Listen Only Rack Optimization These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Module 1756 0A8 1756 0A161 1756 OB8 1756 OB8I 1756 0B16l 1756 0B161S 1756 0B32 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 ON8 1756 OW16l 1756 0X8l CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset CST Timestamped Fuse Dat
45. Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data when Connection Data the bit transitions from Off to On Output Data Data Pt x PWMCycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the PWM Enable configuration tag Output Data Data Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Pt x PWMOnTime REAL PWM On Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data 208 enabled via the PWM Enable configuration tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 0 percent Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Data Tag Definitions Appendix B Array Data Structures Fast digital I O modules use an array data structure In this type of structure all the tags for a particular point are organized under that point For example in Figure 30 all ofthe tags that appear under point 0 also appear under points 1 15 for the input module in slot 1 With this structure you can copy or access all of the data for a particular point by simply referencing or copying the point or alias for the point such as Pt 3 or PressureValveTank3 Figure 30 Array Data Structure Ei Loca Pt E lt Local 1 500 ee Local1 l Pt 0 Data Locali 1 Pt 0 Fault Local 1 I Pt 0 NewDataOff n Local 1 I Pt 0 NewD ataOnOff Local 1 PO TimestampDropped Local T P
46. IN16 146 1756 0H81 168 1756 IV16 147 1756 0N8 169 1756 32 148 1756 0V16E 170 1756 048 149 1756 0V32E 171 1756 0A8D 150 1756 0W16l 172 1756 0A8E 151 1756 0X8l 173 1756 0416 152 This chapter provides wiring diagrams for all ControlLogix digital modules The table describes the different types of digital I O modules Digital 1 0 Type Diagnostic Description These modules provide diagnostic features to the point level These modules have a D at the end of the catalog number Electronic fusing These modules have internal electronic fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module These modules have an E at the end of the catalog number Individually isolated These modules have individually isolated inputs or outputs These modules have an I at the end of the catalog number Fast These modules provide fast response times These modules have an F at the end of the catalog number Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 133 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams Table 30 1756 1 0 Module Features Module Type 1756 digital AC input modules The 1756 digital I O modules support these features Features Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 200 us Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital AC output modules 1756 digital DC input modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 1
47. Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set Output Data Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x Data BOOL Data Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point If PWM is Connection Data enabled this value transitions from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Data 0 0ff or 1 0n Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x Fault BOOL Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set Output Data Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition Connection Data for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset Output Data Data 0 Fuse is not blown or 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done lIndicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection Data Pt x PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached Output Data Data 0 The PWM cycle limit has not yet been reached The bit resets to 0 each time the output or transitions to On to begin a new PWM
48. MAOC instruction with scheduled output modules refer to the Position based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction Application Technique publication 1756 AT017 Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules the following conditions may occur depending on the modules major revision e Ifthe module has a Major Revision 1 it always returns a positive timestamping value e Ifthe module has a Major Revision gt 2 it returns a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first change of state condition occurs Use the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 59 Chapter3 Common Module Features Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller All input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting The table lists the fault word and the associated tag that can be examined in program logic
49. NUM o RTN OUT 0 ControlLogix Electronic Fuse Backplane Circuitry Interface Surge Current Chart 2A Surge Continuous 60 C 140 F B 1A L L 3 0 10 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Group 0 1756 0V32E Daisy Chain to Other RTBs OUT 1 Q2 OUT 3 4 OUT 5 ale OUT 7 65 8 OUT 9 10 OUT 11 enil E OUT 13 14 OUT 15 e DC 0 4 ED 18 OUT 17 ICD 20 OUT 19 ez OUT 21 G 24 OUT 23 D 26 OUT 25 CD 28 OUT 27 30 OUT 29 epa OUT 31 D 34 DC 1 4 E 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 171 Chapter 8 Display Wiring Diagrams 24V 1756 0W16l ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 125V isolated contact module Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring Ze ControlLogix Backplane Interface 172 Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR L1 0 O 11 0 U E L1 2 O 1 2 L1 3 OUT DC 4 O 1 4 C L1 5 L1 6 Jumper Bar L1 7 Cut to Length L1 8 L1 9 L1 10 L1 11 Nonisolated L1 12 Wiring L1 13 L1 14 L1 15 L11 O L1415 Not Used Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 OW 161 D PA
50. O module upon powerup s Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller or a listening peer module containing the current operational status of the module s Output Structure of output data processed by the input module IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 IB16IF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast input module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 e Event Structure of event data continually sent from the I O module to the controller or a listening module containing the current operational status of the module Fast input modules use array data structures Array data structures differ from the flat data structures of other digital I O modules For more information see Array Data Structures on page 209 IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding tag For more information about defining connection and input data types see Create a New Module on page 125 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 187 A
51. Off default per Module 1 Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag to occur or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined Connection Data via the Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be Output Data Data or Scheduled enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled via the per Module Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable tag or 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default Connection Peer Ownership 1 The Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of output logic For example if you specify a cyde limit of 4 and the output turns Off after QUIAE Data DOG WIND Peer 3 cycles all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off Pt x FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains inthe Connection Data Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode stateis Output Data Data or Scheduled defined in the Pt x FaultValue tag per Module Valid values or 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault Connection Peer Ownership condition persists i 1 2 5 or 10 seconds Output Data Data with Peer Pt x P
52. Remote Input Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital input modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network data is transferred to the owner controller at these times e At the RPI the module produces data within its own chassis e At the COS if enabled the 1756 EtherNet IP communication module in the remote chassis immediately sends the module s data over the network to the owner controller as long as it has not sent data within a timeframe that is one quarter the value of the digital input modules RPI This prevents flooding the network with data For example if a digital input module uses an RPI 100 ms the EtherNet IP module sends module data immediately on receiving it if another data packet was not sent within the last 25 ms For more information about specifying an RPI rate see the Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RMO094 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Module Operation Output Modules in a Local Chassis Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 An owner controller sends output data to an output module when either one of two things occur s At the end of every one of its tasks local chassis only s At the rate specified in the modules RPI When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis with respect to the owner controller the owner controller sends d
53. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Point 0 Does not stagger output On transitions default Outputs turn On immediately when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering turns On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became energized simultaneously PWM x CydeLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse Connection Data cycles occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off default 1 Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM CydeLimit tag to occur Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Scheduled per Point 201 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Name PWM x ExecuteAIICycles Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default 1 The PWM CycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce
54. The only difference is the output module is configured for scheduled outputs The outputs are not applied until the scheduled time has occurred The Controller Tags dialog box below shows examples of the tags created in ladder logic Lic Ex Controller Tags cstl controller Scope esti controller Show fShow All v Sot Tag Name Ed always on BOOL Decim E init BOOL Decim O E BEL ES L LastTimestamp 0 DINT Dean m L LastTimestamp 1 DINT Decim Locate ARR Local AB 175 amp Locat C AB 175 Eloa AB175 amp Locatt O AB 175 Time_at_which_Input_Changed_0 lLocatO LCST Timestamp 0 Local 0 1 C DINT Decim l Time at which Input Changed 1 Local 0 1 CSTTimestamp 1 LocalO CDINT Decim LE Time at which O utput Will Change Local 1 0 CS T Timestamp 0 Local 1 0 DINT Decim Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Fast 1 0 Modules This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for fast digital I O modules The Change of State timestamp can be used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on the time that the input transitions The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules In the example below the output follows the state of input 0 but it is delayed by the am
55. Time D Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 169 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0V16E ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module Simplified Schematic 1756 OV16E Display Optoisolation DCO 4 01 OUT 1 ie ic OUT 0 Y X i p S a ee OUT 3 IEB IES OUT2 L OUT 0 BK PONENS fry 4L wan D G 0 lai T OUT 5 ee E OUT 4 roup ry X I C 1A p RTN OUT7 ee O OUT 6 nbs 9 CS T ectronic Fuse DC 0 IQ n RTN OUT 0 ControlLogix Circuitry NI p rJ Backplane IZS TH a Interface OUT 9 IG eS OUT 8 14 TS OUT 11 ia i OUT 10 5 S 5 Surge Current Chart IAN H eeu ouri3 NES d OUTA2 8 17 our15 IER d OUT 4 2A 20 T8 Continuous 60 C 140 C is Ies RTN OUT 1 1A e CON 0 10 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Daisy Chain to Other RTB 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0V32E ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module Simplified Schematic Display Optoisolation DC O 4 Y PC T OUT 0 MN uh pt Uu T A
56. Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State 47 Set RPI 47 Enable Change of State 48 Software Configurable Filter Times 49 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules 49 Multiple Input Point Densities 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but they send data at a change of state only if the COS feature is enabled COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs The table describes the two ways a module sends data to the owner controller Method Description RPI A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer LUS Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Offto On The data is sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Set RPI The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter an RPI The RPI guarantees the slowest rate at which data is multicast The module s actual data transfer rate may be faster than the RPI setting But the RPI provides a defined maximum period of time when data is transferred to the
57. at which Input Changed 0 991817889 991817889 Source B LastTinestamp Source B 1000 991817889 Dest Tine at which Input Changed j 991827889 Not Equal Source A Time at which Input Changed 1 miy 74 Move Source B LastTinestampl Source Time at which Input Changed 0 74 991817889 Dest LastTinestamp0 991817889 my Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 74 Dest LastTimestampl 79 The input point point 0 must have Change of State enabled or the timestamp does not update when the point transitions Once Change of State has been detected 10 ms is added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp This causes the output module to apply its output exactly 10 ms 10 000 us after the input changed state The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state IMPORTANT Timestamps are eight bytes in size two DINTS but only the lower four bytes of the output timestamp Time at which Ouput Will Change are used to schedule the outputs into the future to a max of 16 7 s or 16 700 000 s e Rung 4is the standard XIC OTE rung that controls the output point based on the input point Local 6 10 Data 0 0 Local 6 00 Data 0 0 E d pER E MM End Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 221 Appendix C 222 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration
58. bit per point Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module are faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or overload condition for an output point All 1 bit per point FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault Table 39 Standard Output Module Output Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time 8 bytes CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data DINT Output Status On Off status of the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Table 40 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault lf enabled for a point any NoLoad OutputVerifyFault or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state 1bit per point even if the fault no longer exists until the user clears the fault This does not affect FuseBlown it is always latched 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FaultMode DINT Fault Mode U
59. configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed Filter User configuration varies between modules thus affecting the signal propagation ASIC ASIC scan 200 ps EXAMPLE A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that can contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 IB16 module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by these factors e Hardware delay to energize the input typically 290 us on the 1756 IB16 module e User configurable filter time of 0 1 or 2 ms e ASIC scan of 200 ps In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms the 1756 IB16 module has a 490 ys signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed For nominal and maximum delay times for each module see the 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Specifications Technical Data publication 1756 TD002 Output Modules ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process it internally via hardware and an ASIC scan before sending a signal to the output device via the RT B ASIC Delay Hardware Delay bord Q Q Z N Signal Received from Controller 42702 Signal Sent from RTB Output Point 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal pro
60. controller has produced it They do not take into account the user program time in the owner controller The receipt of new data is a function ofthe length ofthe user program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI The owner controller updates remote output modules at the end of each task as well as at the RPI as described earlier in this section if your application uses these components e 1756 CNB D or 1756 CNBR D modules RSLogix 5000 software version 8 02 00 or later Remote Output Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital output modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network the controller sends output data at these times e When the RPI timer expires e When an Immediate Output IOT instruction if programmed is executed An IOT sends data immediately and resets the RPI timer e When a new schedule is created for a 1756 OB16IEFS module from the motion planner for a cam that has been armed by an MAOC instruction Because the 1756 OBIGIEFS module is the only 1756 module that can be used in a remote chassis with the MAOC instruction it is the only module that receives output data in this scenario Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 33 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Listen only Mode Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules Initial Configuration Any controller in the system can listen to the data
61. d F x L Li Ies le lele Is e e Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in Enable Diag Latching column e To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 57 Chapter3 Common Module Features Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods e Reset Diagnostic Latch service e Software reset during online monitoring e Cycling power to the module s Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Modules Properties screen click the Diagnostics tab R Module Properties Local 5 1756 OA8E 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Reset Latched Diagnostics Status Running 2 In the Reset Latched Diagnostics column click Reset next to the output point for which to reset a latched fault 3 Click OK 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Time scheduled Output Control Time scheduled output control is available for these modules e 1756 OB
62. default Point 1 PWM is enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On PWM x ExtendGyde BOOL Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection Data PWM OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM MinimunOnTime configuration Output Data Scheduled per tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Point 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On time the output remains Off and the cycle does not extend PWM x OnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection Data percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the Output Data Scheduled per PWM Enable tag Point 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage PWMIx StaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by Connection Data staggering On transitions for outputs Otherwise outputs turn On immediately at the start Qutput Data Scheduled per of a cycle
63. details about how to configure 1 0 modules for peer control operation Position based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction publication 1756 AT017 Describes typical applications for using scheduled output modules with the Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC instruction Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication A AT003 Describes how to configure CIP Sync with Integrated Architecture products and applications ControlLogix Chassis and Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN005 Describes how to install and troubleshoot standard and ControlLogix XT versions of the 1756 chassis and power supplies including redundant power supplies ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules User Manual publication 1756 UM009 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot ControlLogix analog 1 0 modules ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module User Manual publication 1756 UM514 Describes how to configure and operate the ControlLogix DH Remote 1 0 module ControlLogix XT Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN638 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the ControlLogix XT Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface module ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Describes how to install configure progra
64. fault Output is shorted to L2 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On Pulse Test fails No Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off No Load bit is off N No Load or output is shorted to L1 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 No Load shows a fault 3 Field Power Loss shows a fault 4 Pulse Test fails Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off No Load bit is set Field Power Loss is set Pulse Test fails wn L1 or L2 are disconnected or outside the 47 63 Hz frequency range 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 2 2 Output Verify bit is set The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage 66 Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 Pulse Test fails When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display Hardware point damage Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until the point is reset Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off During normal operating conditions hardw
65. fe je 5 g NZ o ii L2 0 Z Y A ma E L2 3 a Jj 7 65 N 3 C 2 l i 124 O L2 4 a Jo 92 NA o o lid GND i L2 5 a I ga N 5 12 6 q 1315 N 6 ControlLogix Display Jumperi L2 7 ee E N 7 Backplane Cut to Length ES Uen 17 NB Interface L2 9 gi 198 N 9 ae L2 10 l2 21 D N40 o 4 221 TE 24 23 EDL IN nian bos Lis SU w d G L2 13 G 28 27 N 13 O Additional jumper bars may be purchased 2 4 FE o MIT god by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 235 as m 2 O 1215 834 33 CD NotUsed p Notused CD se 3s CD Not Used ii f CN d Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 1A32 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 132 5V IN 0 Wille tel mo 4 CD Ak iT a IN 3 o 4 sep IN2 Jes 2 p i V ASK Group 0 IN 5 S IR 5 1 IN 4 Group 0 C A S IN 7 HIS 7k IN 6 GND i Daisy Chain INS o 8 IN 8 to Other RTBs M IT ng IN 10 ControlLogix Display 2 14 13 8 IN 12 Backplane Ay 16 15 q IN 14 Interface g 48 17 6 D 12 0 amp 20 19 N 16 1 n8 N 18 joe gia zg N 20 A s ud E
66. filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms OpenWireEn DINT Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable Table 36 Diagnostic Input Module Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed see 8 bytes COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossEn Data DINT Input Status On Off status for each input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status An ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be incorrect 1 bit per point Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module are faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module Open 1 bit per point Wire also is detected 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire DINT Open Wire Diagnostic that detects that a wire has been disconnected from the input point If a group of points shows 1 bit per point this fault then possible the return L1 or GND is missing from the module Also see FieldP
67. is sent to the targeted output circuit The circuit responds as ifa real change of state command was issued but the load device does not transition See page 225 in Appendix C for instructions on performing a pulse test with a CIP Generic Message instruction TIP Consider the following when using the pulse test e Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long periods of time Normal diagnostics catch faults if the outputs are transitioning regularly e When first performing the pulse test verify that the load does not transition Be at the actual load while the test is performed The table explains how a pulse test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible future module conditions Objective Pulse Test Description Detect a blown fuse before it The Blown Fuse diagnostic can be used only when an output module is in the On happens state However you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an Off state to determine whether operating conditions may cause a blown fuse When you perform a pulse test on a module in the Off state the output point is commanded to be On briefly Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo the pulse test reports a failure if the conditions when the point is On indicate a blown fuse may occur See Point level Fault Reporting on page 66 IMPORTANT The pulse test does not guarantee failure of a fuse when the output point turns On It merel
68. logic to reset an electronic fuse for a faulted point perform a pulse test and to reset latched diaganostics MainProgiam Mainfioutine x Local l FuseSlowe U lE Type CIP Genetic IN Message Contial Slotd_BO_fure_reset E at HN s ROT LER Loca 8l Dalad Local al FuseBlowr 1 Type CIP Genetic Ht Message Contiol Slot4 B1 fuse reset im EC DN es HER KH Loca 81 Dala 2 MSG JE Type CIP Generic CEN Massage Conital Pulse_lest_slet4 0 S LOON LEH 1 Move Sourca Pulte toot HA LEHRER 0 Dest Pluse i Slot4 0 2H0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0D00_0000_O000 e Loca 01 Dala 3 Type CIP Genetic Message Control m reset E n LH End Click the box in each rung to see the associated configuration and communication The rungs perform these functions e Rungs 0 and 1 are used to perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1 respectively The example is of a 1756 OA8D module in slot 4 s Rung2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4 s Rung3 moves the results ofthe pulse test to a data storage location The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag name EXERR s Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4 This example shows an output module Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 225 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The Controller Tags dialog box sho
69. module 173 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 15 Chapter1 Nhat Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Figure 1 Parts Illustration DC OUTPUT io B 3 d sroizsases 9 zy 6 Removable Terminal Block s dol eS a baht E e e e o _ e o ie D e e e Cp 2 4 o H R 1 e o H vor 3 D e oe D e o la dmi e Iai e e O o e 40200 M Item Description 1 Backplane Connector Interface for the ControlLogix system that connects the module to the backplane 2 Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or IFM onto the module 3 Status Indicators Indicators display the status of communication module health and input output devices Indicators help in troubleshooting anomalies 4 Connector pins Input output power and grounding connections are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM 5 Locking tab The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM on the module maintaining wiring connections 6 Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent making the wrong wire connections to your module 16 Rockwell Automation Publicat
70. module fault word Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 75 Chapter 4 76 Diagnostic Module Features Module fault Word All modules Field Power Loss Word 1756 IA8D only Open Wire Word Fault bits in the field power loss word and open wire word are logically entered into the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 13 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Communications fault Bits Set All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Field power loss Open wire Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0 1 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A field power loss or open wire condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 Aloss of field power sets the bit for that group in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word An open wire condit
71. modules provide quick response time for high speed control applications The table lists the available fast digital I O modules Cat No 1756 IB16lF Description 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control input module 1756 0B16IEF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control output module 1756 0B16IEFS 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast scheduled per point output module Fast Input Module When designing systems with ControlLogix fast input modules consider these factors Compatibility e Voltage necessary for your application e Sensor performance and specifications e Whether your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 79 Chapter5 ast Module Features Fast Output Module Compatibility Fast Features 80 ControlLogix fast output modules can be used to drive a variety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include these items e Solenoids e Indicators Follow these guidelines when designing a system e Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation s Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads refer to the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device Outputs
72. o 4 IN 11 IN 12 dl N 13 o oe IN 14 N 15 o o e Not Used Not Used E rl EB ED EH D E D ED D C EST D E GH E D D Simplified Schematic 1756 1V16 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module 45V NE M j ControlLogix Backplane Interface Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Display Group 0 N 1 N 3 N 5 N 7 DC 0 4 N 9 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 IV16 za CET E ED 92 ee 2 Gere e EB C3 EB 92 G3 27 S Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 wo oe N 2 Group 0 N 4 N 6 DC 0 N 8 Z o N 10 N 12 Group 1 147 1756 1V32 35V o ControlLogix Display Backplane Interface n 7 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams Simplified Schematic DC 0 C 0 D L A ae T GND gt 148 Group 0 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Jumper Wire Group 1 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module
73. on fast output modules can be directly wired to inputs on fast input modules Module features include all the common features described in Chapter 3 as well the extended capabilities described within this chapter For higher speed control the 1756 OB16IEF output module can be configured to receive input status over the backplane directly from the 1756 IB16IF input module or 1756 LSC8XIB8I counter module without controller processing This feature know as peer ownership is described in the ControlLogix Peer Ownership Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 IMPORTANT To configure the modules you must have the following e The 1756 0B16IEF module requires RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 or later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 or later e The 1756 0B16IEFS module requires Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 or later e The Add on Profile AOP for each module available for download at http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Features Specific to Fast Input Modules Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Response Time The tables below indicate the screw to backplane response time of fast input and fast output modules Table 16 Input Response Time Delay Response Time Total On Off delay screw to backplane 14 us nom 23 ys max user configurable filter time Hardware delay lt 1 ys nom 2 US ma
74. output remains in the Fault mode state as long as the fault condition persists s Final state Defines whether the output transitions to the On or Off state after the duration of the Fault mode state elapses By default the output transitions to the Off state EXAMPLE You define a duration of 1 second and a final state of On for an output point If a fault occurs at that point the output remains in its Fault mode state Off On or Hold for 1 second before transitioning to the On state IMPORTANT Ifa connection is reestablished after an output point goes into Fault mode but before the duration time elapses the settings you specify for the duration and final state no longer apply For example if you specify a 10 second duration and a final state of Off and the fault ends in 3 seconds the output point never transitions to the final state of Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 91 Chapter5 bast Module Features For more information about defining a Fault mode state refer to Configurable Point level Output States on page 51 Follow these steps to configure a fault state delay 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Output State tab Wil Module Properties Local 6 1756 OB16IEF 1 1 General Connection Module Info Output State PM Configuration Diagnostics Time Sync Output State During Fault Mode Output State Point Program Mode Fault Mode Duration Final State Off Forever
75. regardless of output logic For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Scheduled per Point PWM x CydeLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns On e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is set the configured number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared the configured number of cycles occur only if the output remains On For example if the cycle limit is 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle does not occur The default cyde limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag Connection Data Output Data Scheduled per Point PWM x MinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 percent Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Data Output Connection Data Output Data Scheduled per Point Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fau
76. s task execution In other words an input may be updated in the controller at any time during the controllers execution of the tasks it is configured to run The input device determines when the input is sent based on its configuration An input module behavior also varies depending upon whether it operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis The following sections detail the differences in data transfers between local and remote installations Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 0S Multicast RPI Multicast Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the following two configuration parameters affect how and when an input module multicasts data s Requested packet interval RPI e Change of state COS RPI The RPI defines the slowest rate at which a module multicasts its data to the owner controller The time ranges from 200 ys 750 ms and is sent to the module with all other configuration parameters When the specified time frame elapses the module multicasts data This is also called a cyclic update cos COS instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off or Off to On The transition is referred to as a change of state IMPORTANT The module s COS feature defaults to Enabled for both On to Off and Off to On COS
77. tag Input Data Timestamp Data 0 No new event has occurred since the last acknowledged event 1 Anew event has occurred since the last acknowledged event Event x EventDropped BOOL Event Dropped Indicates whether an event has been dropped Connection Data with Event or Listen Ifthe LatchEvents output tag is set the last recorded event is retained until Only with Event acknowledged and a subsequent event is dropped Input Data Timestamp Data Ifthe LatchEvents output tag is cleared the last unacknowledged event is overwritten 0 An event has not been dropped 1 An event has been dropped Event x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Valid Indicates whether a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the Connection Data with Event or Listen backplane at the time of an event Only with Event 0 CIP Sync was not available on the backplane at the time of an event Input Data Timestamp Data 1 CIP Sync was available on the backplane at the time of an event Event x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP SyncTimout Indicates that a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the backplane Connection Data with Event or Listen at the time of an event but has since timed out Only with Event 0 CIP Sync has not timed out Input Data Timestamp Data 1 CIP Sync was available on the backplane but has since timed out prior to the event occurring Event x Data INT Module Data Shows the input data for all 16 points on the module at the time an Con
78. tags when a rising edge occurs Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are not cleared 1 Events are cleared when a rising edge occurs LatchEvents BOOL Latch Event When set latches an event until the event is acknowledged Once Connection Data with Event acknowledged the event is overridden by a new event Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are overridden by new events 1 Events are latched until acknowledged and new events are ignored Pt x NewDataOffOnAck BOOL Acknowledge Off to On Transition A rising edge acknowledges Off to On transitions Connection Data by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn x and Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOffOn input tags or 0 Offto On transitions are not acknowledged u u u Connection Data with Event 1 Off to On transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOffAck BOOL Acknowledge On to Off Transition A rising edge acknowledges On to Off transitions Connection Data by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt x Timestamp OnOff x and Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOff input tags or 0 On to Off transitions are not acknowledged u u u Connection Data with Event 1 On to Off transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x DataOverrideEn BOOL Override Data When set simulates an input
79. terminals per output x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 9 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output 1756 0B16IS 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 9 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 x cable length 243 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0832 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 149
80. the length of the program scan the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 31 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Output Modules in a If an output p physically in ina ro pus than Qu of the NM owner controller the owner controller normally sends data to the output module Remote Chassis at the RPI rate specified Updates are not performed at the end of the controller s tasks In addition the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly with respect to getting data from the owner controller Remote Output Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis connected to the owner controller by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system guarantees that the output module receives data at least as often as the specified RPI as shown in the illustration below Figure 5 Remote Output Modules on ControlNet Network Local Chassis Remote Chassis RE ROS Gy 8 nod
81. the module samples the field side state and compares it to the system side state Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B If an output cannot be verified a point level fault is sent to the controller Follow these steps to enable the field side output verification 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab R Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 Enable Diag Program Mode Fault Mode Output Verity Latching QAI QKK XI SI SII XI Ie F M M M If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Communications Failure Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Output Verify column s To enable the feature for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable the feature for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 73 Chapter 4 74 Diagnostic Module Features Pulse Test Pulse test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output load device A short pulse
82. to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input module Table 4 Fault Word on Input Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each modules density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only 16 bits 0 15 are used in the module fault word Table 5 Bits Set in Module fault Word Bits Set Condition Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix standard digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Y Module fault Word All Modules A communication fault sets all bits in the module fault word 42676 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers Common Module Features Chapter 3 ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller Like input modules output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting However some output modules use additional words to indicat
83. transition when in Run mode by Connection Data or Data with Event overriding the actual input state with the value defined in the Pt x DataOverrideValue Input Data Timestamp Data output tag This function is useful for validating timestamping 0 The state of an input device is not being overridden 1 The state of an input device is being overridden by the value defined in the Pt x DataOverride output tag Pt x DataOverrideValue BOOL Override Data Value Defines the value to be applied to the input point when the Connection Data or Data with Event corresponding bit in the Pt x DataOverrideEn tag is enabled Input Data Timestamp Data 0 The input state is Off A timestamp is recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OnOff x input tag ona falling edge 1 The input state is On A timestamp is recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn x input tag on a rising edge Event x Mask INT Event Mask When enabled for a point an event is triggered when the state ofthe input Connection Data with Event matches the value of the corresponding bits in the Event x Value tag For more Input Data Timestamp Data information see page 89 Event x Value INT Event Value Defines whether an input point must be in the On or Off state beforean Connection Data with Event event is triggered An event is only triggered if the corresponding bits in the Event x Mask Input Data Timestamp Data tag is enabled For more information see page 89 0 The input
84. update time NUT owner controller program mode rack connection rack optimization remote connection removal and insertion under power RIUP removable terminal block RTB requested packet interval RPI run mode service system side tag timestamping 250 A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to the module that does not affect its function or interface Data transmissions that reach a specific group of one or more destinations A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers use exactly the same configuration information to simultaneously own an input module The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be sent ona ControlNet network The NUT ranges from 2 ms to 100 ms The controller that creates and stores the primary configuration and communication connection to a module In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is not executing s Inputs are still actively producing data e Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured Program mode An I O connection where the 1756 CNB module collects digital I O words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet connections and bandwidth A communication format in which the 1756 CNB module collects all digital I O words in the remote chassis and sends them to controller as a single rack image An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O module
85. wj off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Off Forever Off Forever Off Forever Off Forever Off Forever Off Forever v v v Nj xl Nj L xi NI N C xi v I v v IR le le Ik le le le Ik Ik Ik Ik Ik le le ik Communications Failure Tf communications fail in S Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode O Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline 2 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description 1756 0B161EF 1756 0B161EFS Configuration Tag Configuration Tag Fault Mode Output State Choose the length of time you want the output to remain in Fault mode state Pt x FaultValueStateDuration FaultValueStateDuration Duration before transitioning to the final state 1second 2seconds 5seconds e 10seconds Forever default IMPORTANT If you choose Forever the output remains in the Fault mode state until a connection is reestablished For example if the Fault mode is Hold and you specify a duration of Forever then the output retains its Hold state and does not transition to a Final state if a fault occurs Fault Mode Output State Choose whether you want the module to transition to an On or Off state after the Pt x FaultFinalState FaultFinalState Final State Fault mode duration time elapses The def
86. 0 F NC T Daisy Chain to Other RTBs wae Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 0 10 ms Time 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 0B32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V output module 1756 0B32 Simplified Schematic DC 0 B A p OUT QD A OUTO Group 0 OUT 3 ja 3 V Y 2 OUT 5 q e 5 2 LX E OUT 7 Qe 7 V e RTN OUT 0 Daisy Chain OUT 9 Eo 9 5 2c OUT 11 lha Y j r ControlLogix Backplane Interface i OUT 13 y 13 G Display OUT 15 Qhe 15 DC 0 4 CDs 17 OUT17 CD po 19 ouT 19 1G 22 21 C Surge Current Chart QUT 21 Da 23 OUT 23 D6 25 Surge Group 1 OUT 25 Dz 27 1A OUT 27 E 30 29 E Continuous 60 C 140 F OUT29 COga 31 5 05A OUT 31 s4 ss D DC 1 Dhs 35 d 0 10m Time DC COM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams OUT 28 OUT 30 RTN OUT 1 Chapter 8 Group 0 Group 1 165 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0C8 ControlLogix DC 30 60V output module
87. 0B16lS 1756 0B16IEFS Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Configurable Point level Output States Individual outputs can be configured to unique output states if the module goes into Program mode or Fault mode IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of outputs turn Off during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited outputs turn Off Follow these steps to configure an output state 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 1 1756 OA8 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode f Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel 2 From the Program Mode pull down menu choose whether the module s output state is On or Off during Program mode e On e Off e Hold Retain current output state 3 From the Fault Mode pull down menu choose whether the module s output state during Fault mode e On e Off e Hold Retain current output state 4 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 51 Chapter 3 52 Common Module Features Output Data Echo Du
88. 0F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 OW16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output pale 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1756 0X8l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output aiae 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated wi
89. 1 inputs mapped to the output point Connection Peer Ownership with the value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow1Value output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerWindow1Value BOOL Override Peer Window 1 Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to peer window 1 Connection Peer Ownership inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerWindow1En output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n Pt x PWMCycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the Pt x PWMEnable configuration tag Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer 199 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 49 1756 0B16IEF Module Output Data Tags continued Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x PWMOnTime REAL PWM 0n Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable configuration tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Valid values per Module 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or or Connection Peer Ownership 0 100 0 percent Output Data Data with Peer TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates the difference between the
90. 12 O O Sink Input Wiring GND 13 Cs 27 N 13 6 c O Wiring Additional jumper bars may be purchased GND 14 TE 30 29 Na o o by using catalog number 1756 JMPR GND 15 l2 31k N15 O O DC o GND 15 D s4 33 4 Not Used o DC Not Used CD se 35 zi Not Used H L 3 d Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 IB16IF Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sinking or sourcing isolated fast input module 1756 IB16IF Isolated Wiring GND 0 SERES N 0 DC 1 o GND 1 ej s ED N1 o o o0 DC4 4 DC2 o GND 2 gjs s EN N2 o o o o DC2 GND 3 Dis 0 N 3 1 GND 4 10 9 D N 4 Module Source Input Wiring HRH 9 o O 6ND5 12 ne NS o DC5 4 DC 6 o o O GND an 13 6D N 6 o DCB GND 7 16 15 N 7 Jumper Bar Cut to Length cip n a us H GND 9 Da 9D Fi lus Module Sink Input Wiring Nonisolated Wiring D IE ze 21 EDT n0 o o oND a zs EDT n o 0 9 GND 12 D 26 25 N 12 o 0 9 Additional jumper bars may be purchased GND 13 Shia z N 13 o o b
91. 16IEF ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically protected sinking or sourcing isolated fast output module Simplified Schematic DC 0 Isolator ae 2 ER Ze OUT 0 RT C_D Display ControlLogix Backplane Interface Surge Current Chart Surge 4A Continuous 2 A 45 C 113 F g 2A E Continuous 1 A 60 C 140 F 0 10 ms Time 1756 0B16IEF Isolated Sourcing Isolated Wiring Output Wiring DC0 4 o DC 0 2 168 ouT 0 O DC 0 DC 1 gua s OUT 1 DC 2 4 o DC 2 Dle s OUT 2 o DC2 Dese Tayler epp OUTS DC 4 Cp ed OUT 4 Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 FEN ETT OUTS DC 6 4 Qr DCB 14 438 OUT 6 o DC 6 DC 7 16 15 4 OUT 7 Jumper Bar DC 8 Eh 1712 OUT 8 Cut to Length DC 9 20 19 4 OUT 9 DC 0 q 22 21 a OUT 10 Nonisolated DCL CD zg HEI 7 Nonisolated Wiring DC 12 CD 26 25 CD OUT 12 Sourcing DC 13 D cra OUT3 Output DC 14 A Wiring H Tenis 29 0UT 14 DC 5 4 a 32 31 4 OUT 15 e DC O DC 15 CDj34 33 4 Not Used a lot Use Cla an Not Used O IE e DC m N Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Additional jumper bars may be purchased 162 Rock
92. 16IS Provides time scheduled output control in CST time for outputs 0 7 Enables schedules with a minimum interval of 100 us e 1756 OB16IEFS Provides time scheduled output control in CIP Sync time for outputs 0 15 Enables schedules with a minimum interval of 5 ys By using the time scheduled output control feature the module can turn the outputs On or Offat a scheduled time You can set the time for the output to turn On or Off in program logic The modules manage the time locally so that the output is turned On or Offat the specified time MAOC Instructions with Time scheduled Output Control The Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC instruction provides position based control of outputs by using position and velocity information of any motion axis When the 1756 OB16IS or 1756 OBIGIEFS module is specified as the output destination for the MAOC instruction the MAOC instruction automatically handles time based scheduling for outputs The benefit of using output scheduling in this manner is that the resolution of the output control is improved from the motion coarse update rate typically 1 32 ms to 100 us for outputs 0 7 on the 1756 OBI6IS module and 10 ys for outputs 0 15 on the 1756 OBIGIEFS module You can also use outputs 8 15 on the 1756 OB16IS module with the MAOC instruction However only outputs 0 7 have 100 us resolution Outputs 8 15 are updated at the motion coarse update rate For more information about using the
93. 2 CABLEXZ 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals ae 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM4024 8R Relay Master 40 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16R 40 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16RF 40 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Eight channel expander with 24V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM24 16RF Expander with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0C8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard india 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Vr abielengt 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0616 N A 1756 0H8l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs annaig 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra t
94. 2 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 1B161 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1756 IB16IF G x x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Fusible Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1756 1B32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM40D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators for inputs 1756 1C16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1756 1616 N A 1756 1H161 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY l x cable length 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Isolated w
95. 3 Ho Configuration amp 1756 Backplane 1756 410 a 1 1756 174 Digital Test 8 BERESSOREI C 2 2 S aed yey X Cut CHS Copy Ctrl C B pas Delete Del Cross Reference CHE Properties x Alt Enter Print E 2 On the Module Properties dialog box click the tab corresponding to the feature to modify and then click OK s To configure connection properties between the module and the controller see page 131 s To configure features common to all modules see Chapter 3 s To configure features specific to diagnostic modules see Chapter 4 e To configure features specific to fast modules see Chapter 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Connection Properties Connection properties define controller to module behavior When defining connection properties you can do the following s Selecta requested packet interval RPI to set a defined maximum period of time when data is transferred to the owner controller e Choose to inhibit the module e Configure the controller so that a loss of connection to this module causes a major fault e View information about the condition of the connection between the module and the controller Follow these steps to configure connection properties 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Connection tab E Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info
96. 33V 3 xX5 1V x24V x33V 4 x5 1V x24V x33V 5 xX5 1V x24V x33V 6 xX5 1V x24V x33V 7 xX5 1V x24V x33V 8 xX5 1V x24V x33V 9 x5 1V x24V x33V 10 x5 1V x24V x33V 11 xX5 1V x24V x33V 12 x5 1V x24V x33V 13 x5 1V x24V x33V 14 x5 1V x24V x33V 15 xX5 1V x24V x33V 16 x5 1V x24V x33V Totals mA W 1 mA W 2 mA W 3 This number This number This number cannot exceed the cannot exceed cannot exceed following 2800 mA 4000 mA 10000 mA for 1756 PA72 1756 PB72 13000 mA for 1756 PA75 1756PB75 1756 PC75 1756 PH75 These three wattage values 1 2 3 added together cannot exceed 75 W 60 C 140 F for any power supply Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 231 AppendixD Choose a Correct Power Supply Notes 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Appendix E Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules This appendix provides data to help you choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive Bulletin 500 series motor starters in your application The tables list the number of motor starters five sizes are listed for each module that a particular digital I O module can drive IMPORTANT When using the tables remember that the supply voltage for each module must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage Table 61 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 120V AC 60 Hz
97. 56 081600 1756 0816 9 9 Yes Fused on a per group basis 1756 0816 8 9 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 OB16lEF 2 6 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0B161EFS 8 1756 081615 9 9 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 0832 9 5x20mm Littelfuse p n 800mA SP001 1003 or Schurter p n 216 800 1756 0cg 9 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 06160 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 OH8I 8 1756 OV16E2 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused 1756 OV32E 6 6 Relay 1756 0W161 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 0x8l 6 3A Medium lag MT 4 6 3A 1 For voltages above 132V AC the Interface Modules IFM are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing A rated terminal block for the intended application must be used 2 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices 3 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached All other channels with a NUT of that group continu
98. 6 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 0A8D 1756 OA8E Electronically fused per point 1756 0A16 Mechanically fused group 3 15 A 250V AC slow blow 1500 A interruption current Littelfuse p n H2153 15 All other modules Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs see publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical Reverse polarity protection All modules except 1756 IG16 module Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 100 us for sequence of events modules 200 ys for all other modules Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital DC output modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 OB8EI 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 OB16IEF 1756 OB16IEFS 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E Electronically fused per point All other modules not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software co
99. 6165 KE eee doe MH EP OP EIS EE ERES 144 1756 IR LOT nu a tude sop irate s ei Pe t neue hoe RAT 145 1756 IM IGL 5 uet eei E E eU ee IX 146 Kele H L cce py VER pore xu mee t PU bor d ponds 146 1756 V 16 1225 chet er siete ete Datei ole e E abor A22 Ll cid 147 1236 V 32 6 ssostogd eo ski deu team ove Xo PIER USE uH 148 Wi er V E 149 V7 SO OASDD perm 150 sro OASE acter hee eo Odie ek eet trie gon A Be aed band 151 PP SCADATG Mp HH ee Z eh NE 152 V7 SOA ALG m 153 75699B8 gus cheek dK tay aie lel hE Uk ceto s Ls do Med 154 V7 SO20 BSE M25 tong doct eei De de Eis 155 rb obl m 156 1756 OBIGD oe euet tib AE E EPIIT RE K 157 756 TROER vostre tis ex ELT io oro Ra 158 1756 9BlI OLI uc ccce dou e hebr enent tazdtdai sibique 161 1736 OBLIGIEE eroe tenes dated e ver T Cel SS ponds 162 1756 ODBLIOLBES 7 ras 2 ER Ed TRR xe interes 163 1756 OBIGIS 25 ca ket cum EHI I URNA THES 164 15040 B32 st aa testet qae t teras S NOE ceste d pce rat 165 sog R IER 166 1756 0G16525 2 E aere Eaton ivo ue PES C ERE ER RC 167 1756 49 ESI seite du a ii OS Sande wee vx UR 168 V7 SCAN B pric ae 169 1756 OV NG Bead eei al a e club aee ete 170 1756 0 V32E ase en ee que eas 171 Iz50 O WV DOE rgo eteso teste pue teres tutelle cedet ptt 172 AT SOMO NB sae e Eo cay edes a chia De Weed 173 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module Status Indicators for Input Modules 175 Status Indicators for Output Modules eee 176 Use RSLogix 5000 Soft
100. 92 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs TRUE 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 OB8EI 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output REN 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1756 0B8l N A 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0B16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals aves 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage status indicator circuit with four isolated groups and fo
101. ASCII text string description You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information For more information refer to page 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 17 Chapter1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Notes 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Topic Page Ownership 20 Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 Internal Module Operation 21 Connections 23 Input Module Operation 26 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 27 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 28 Output Module Operation 31 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 31 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 32 Listen only Mode 34 Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules 34 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 35 I O modules are the interface between controllers and field devices in a ControlLogix system Digital I O modules transfer data to devices that require just one bit to be represented 0 or 1 For example a switch is open or closed or a light is on or off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 19 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Ownership Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 I O modules in a ControlLogix system can be owned by an RSLogix 5000 controller An owner controller fulfills these functions e Stores confi
102. B module collects all digital input words in the remote chassis and sends them to the controller as a single rack image This connection type limits the status and diagnostic information available Listen Only tInput Data These formats have the same definition as the similarly named Listen Only CST Timestamped Input Data options above except that they are Listen only connections Listen Only Rack Optimization Module 1756 1A16 1756 1A16l 1756 1A32 1756 1B161 1756 IB16 1756 1B32 1756 1C16 1756 1616 1756 IH161 1756 IM16l 1756 1N16 1756 1V16 1756 132 Full Diagnostic Input Data Module returns input data the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changes and diagnostic data 1756 1A8D 1756 IB16D Listen Only Full Diagnostic Input Data Table 27 Input Module Connection Formats This format has the same definition as Full diagnostic input data except that it is a Listen only connection Connection Format Input Data Data Return Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time To configure per point timestamping see page 83 Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps This format is useful when the highest possible throughput is required Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections e Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time e
103. Bs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 C s C s KO uet Curb aco epi igo qn ee pu ene E epe OO cic B RO G KA KA A 0c coc c coccccoccocoOccocc St Di M Not Used Not Used 555555555555 S gt Chapter 8 o 12 0 oDC20 173 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams Notes 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Status Indicators for Input Modules Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module Topic Page Status Indicators for Input Modules 175 Status Indicators for Output Modules 176 Use RSLogix 5000 Software for Troubleshooting 178 This appendix describes the status indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module Each I O module has status indicators on the front of the module ControlLogix input modules support the status indicators described in Table 31 below The available status indicators vary by module catalog number as shown in Figure 25 on page 176 Table 31 Status Indicators for Input Modules Indicator Status OK Status Steady green Description The inputs are being multicast and in a normal operating state Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not multicasting inputs or is inhibited Uninhibit the connection or establish a connection to enable communication to the module Steady red The module must be replaced
104. Fault or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer InputPartnerActive BOOL Input Partner is Active Indicates whether the peer input module is actively producing Connection Peer Ownership input data to be consumed by a 1756 0B16IEF module Output Data Data with Peer 0 No input peer module is currently producing input data to be consumed by a 1756 0B16IEF module 1 The input peer module is actively producing input data to be consumed by a 1756 OB16lEF module for use in its peer logic InputPartnerFault BOOL Input Partner Fault Indicates whether the peer input module has faulted due to a Connection Peer Ownership connection loss If the peer input module is faulted the output module uses only controller Output Data Data with Peer data to determine the output state 0 The input peer module has not faulted 1 The input peer module has faulted and outputs transition to the configured Fault mode State InputPartnerSlot SINT Input Partner Slot Indicates the slot number of the peer input module Connection Peer Ownership Valid values Output Data Data with Peer e 0 16 e 1 No peer input module is defined InputPartnerStatus SINT Input Partner Status Indicates the status of the peer input module Connection Peer Ownership Valid values Output Data Data with Peer 2 Communication Fault Peer connection is lost 6 Run Peer connection open an
105. FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Scheduled per 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default Point 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output continues PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Scheduled per Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared Point 0 Off 1 0n 200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Scheduled per 0 Output turns Off once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and Point module is still faulted 1 Outpu
106. Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chassis communication 1 0 Status Yellow The input is On Fault Status Red The input has encountered a fault Check the input point at the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 175 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Figure 25 Input Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number 1756 IB16 1756 IB161 1756 1C16 1756 1G16 1756 IA8D 1756 1A16 1756 1H161 1756 IV16 1756 IB16IF N N AC INPUT DC INPUT DC INPUT 1 0 Status 3 3 3 Indicator A HI 0 OK Status ST 01234567 0 S 01234567 Q Status Tus n a K LJ Indicator ST 8910111213 1415 K s 8910112131415 K 8 8 8 DIAGNOSTIC PEER DEVICE 1756 IA8D 1756 IA161 1756 IB16D 1756 1A32 1756 1732 1756 IM161 1756 IN16 DC INPUT amp DCINPUT amp ACINPUT 5101234567 3 ober d i 3 3 FHT01234567 ST 89 Pe yee 0 Pepe UB K st 89101112133 1415 K L ST 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 3111112222 FLT 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 8 3167890123 8 8 322222233 DIAGNOSTIC 514567 8901 20945 Status Indicators ControlLogix output modules support the status indicators described in for Output Modules 176 Table 32 below The available status indic
107. GND2 V 22 STT M GND2 TE STT Itt GND 3 Ea STT GND 3 T zED MO Group 3 GND3 JQ SU N 14 GND3 TT N 15 GND3 FE Not Used NotUsed 72 Not Used Wiring Diagrams Recommended Leakage Resistor Size 1 4 W 5 Supply Voltage 3 9K 10V DC 5 6K 12V DC 15K 24V DC 20K 30V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 8 Group Group Group Group 139 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated input module 1756 1B161 TN Isolated DC0 o GND 0 p 2 1 IN0 o o o DCH IN 0 o Wiring pci jo GND 1 LED 4 38 Ni o oo DC Ld C GND 2 Die 5 lN cp GND 3 p ral I X K S S GND 4 M RE us GND 1 DESL o O Oy DD TTS ne o DCS 4 S DC6 a T GND 6 D4 19T N6 o DC6 4 s GND 7 amp p 1 15 ED IN7 oo Display Jumper Bar Cut to Length GND 8 Dina 70 N 8 uds v GND 3 D 20 19 4 N 9 Interface GND 10 SEES epn 21 N 10 O O 4 GND 11 D 24 23 d N 11 O lt Nonisolated GND 12 CD25 25 g N
108. H EN P May 2015 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Preface What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Common Module Features Table of Contents Studio 5000 Environment esses For More Information n Chapter 1 Available Features Re I O Modules in the ControlLogix System sese Module Identification and Status Information sL Chapter 2 TET c ves eee Uu uibs d a EXE BER Nisan iet itat Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software eee ee eee Internal Module ODGIatioHt on eecure ee Renee reu put e endet Input Modules code obe i ru een cu oet v rdc fh coe utpat Modulesia sese Zia a aae Raa L t t Gonhectlohs cese vers tede eu d Ue va ORE ERR S Do Ve e vata Direct Connections sie oho e e Rack optimized Connections Suggestions for Rack optimized Connections Input Module Operatiotraussoceteu mie root ELE eoodadens peated Input Modules in a Local Chassis sse digg E COS c Trigger Event Tasks cosesceptceerere sd el eee d TEUER Input Modules in a Remote Chassis Remote Input Modules Connected via the Co trolNet Network n deo 2 S os ideis Tos od E bt Remote Input Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network 2 25 etie p PR eO s Output Module Operation Output Modules in a Local Chassis Output Modules ina Remote Chassis Remote Output Modules
109. H O CIPS yncValid Local T PI O CIPSyncTimeout ocal 1 l Pt 0 InputO verrideStatus Local1 I Pt 0 Timestamp H Local 1 1 Pt 0 Timestamp OffOn H Local 1 1 Pt 0 Timestamp OnOff H Local 1 1 Pt1 H Local 1 1 Pt 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Other digital I O modules use a flat data structure In this type of structure only one instance of a tag exists for a module For example in Figure 31 only one instance of each tag appears under the input module in slot 3 To reference or copy data for an individual point you specify the tag name followed by a bit number such as Data 0 or EventOverflow 3 Unlike an array structure where all the data for a point can be accessed via a single tag reference a flat structure requires multiple tag references to access all the data for a point Figure 31 Flat Data Structure Local 3 Teen EE Locat3 Fault 281111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 FE Locak3 1 Data 280000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 T Locat 3 NewData 280000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 O000 0000 T Local 31 E vent verflow 280000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 oca 21 RetumingLlCT Time oca 21 RetumingCIPSyncTime ocal 21 0PSuncv ald ocal 3 l CIPSyncTimeout H Local 3 1 E ventNumber HE Local3 LocalClockOffset T Local 3 Offsettimestamp Local 3 1 Timestamp mie Jojioioliolijo The 1756
110. IA8D 79 132V AC8 point diagnostic input module 135 1756 IA16 74 132V AC 16 point input module 135 1756 IA161 79 132V AC 16 point isolated input module 136 1756 1432 74 132V AC 32 point input module 137 1756 IB16 10 31 2V DC 16 point input module 138 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 139 1756 IB16l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated input module 140 1756 IB16lF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control input module 141 1756 IB32 10 31 2V DC 32 point input module 142 1756 IC16 30 60V DC 16 point input module 143 1756 IG16 Transitor transitor logic TTL input module 144 1756 IH161 90 146V DC 16 point isolated input module 145 1756 IM16l 159 265V AC 16 point isolated input module 146 1756 IN16 10 30V AC 16 point input module 146 1756 IV16 10 30V DC 16 point sourcing current input module 147 1756 IV32 10 30V DC 32 point sourcing current input module 148 1756 0A8 74 265V AC8 point output module 149 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC8 point diagnostic output module 150 1756 0A8E 74 132V AC8 point electronically fused output module 151 1756 0A16 74 265V AC 16 point output module 152 1756 0A161 74 265V AC 16 point isolated output module 153 1756 0B8 10 30V DC8 point output module 154 1756 OB8El 10 30V DC 8 point electronically fused isolated output module 155 1756 0B8l 10 30V DC 8 point isolated output module 156 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module 157 1 The ControlLogix system h
111. Interface 12 T ours IIS IE ans 14 1 OUT 11 3 Ies OUT 10 Eu E OUT 12 EC Group 1 1 Group 1 UT 14 m S cB RD eB Lo Soe E DC 1 Surge Current Charts Typical Note At currents greater than 4 Amps the trip time can be as fast as 20uS Figure 20 Current vs Time to Trip When Using a 10V DC Power Supply 10V DC Current Vs Tim e m I 160 I4 131 Im 80 60 40 20 n Time im 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Figure 21 Current vs Time to Trip When Using a 12V DC Power Supply 12V DC Current Vs Tim e m 4 500 450 40 3M 300 28 20 I5 100 50 Time m Figure 22 Current vs Time to Trip When Using a 16V DC Power Supply 16V DC Current Vs Tim e m 3s 3n 250 200 I5 1m 50 Time m Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 8 Curent Curent 159 Chapter 8 160 Wiring Diagrams Figure 23 Current vs Time to Trip When Using a 24V DC Power Supply 24V DC Current Vs Tim e m 1a 14 1X Im 80 60 40 Time m Figure 24 Current vs Time to Trip When Using a 31 2V DC Power Supply 31 2V DC Current Vs Tim e m S 1 14 131 100 80 6n 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Current A L ure nt TN 1756 08161 Wiring Diagrams Chapt
112. Module Fault Word Condition Bit set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital output modules Bit 0 Y A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault word A Fuse Blown condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault word A blown fuse for any point sets the bit for that point in the FuseBlown tag and also sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault word In the example above the bit for the FuseBlown tag is set indicating a blown fuse at point 9 Bits set for the Fault input tag indicate I O data may be incorrect due to a fault due to one of these conditions e FuseBlown 1 e PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds e PWMOnrTime outside the valid range of 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 percent e PWMCycleTime lt PWMOnTime Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Topic Page Install the Module 107 Key the Removable Terminal Block 109 Connect the Wires 110 Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 115 Choose Extended depth Housing 116 Install the Removable Terminal Block 118 Remove the Re
113. NT Filter Times Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups 1 byte per group Table 34 Standard Input Module Data Tags of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed see 8 bytes COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossEn Data DINT Off 0n Status for each input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status An an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be 1 bit per point incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module are faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault Table 35 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off Triggers an event in the controller for On to Off transition of input point and causes the 1bit per point input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable COS
114. None GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data event Table 54 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Data BOOL Data lIndicates the On Off state to apply to a nonscheduled output point Connection Data 0 Off Output Data Scheduled per 1 0n Point ScheduleMask BOOL Schedule Mask A mask indicating which output points are scheduled Connection Data 0 The output point is unscheduled The On Off state is determined by the value in the Output Data Scheduled per Data output tag Point 1 The output point is scheduled The On Off state is determined by the Schedule x Data output tag ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data when Connection Data the bit transitions from Off to On Output Data Scheduled per Point TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates the difference between the system time and the modules Connection Data local time The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Output Data Scheduled per
115. OB16IEFS module uses either type of data structure depending on how you configure the module For more information see page 200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 209 AppendixB Tag Definitions Notes 210 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Using Message Instructions Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform RunTime Services and Reconfiguration Topic Page Using Message Instructions 211 Processing Real time Control and Module Services 212 One Service Performed Per Instruction 212 Create a New Tag 212 You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module For example page 55 shows how to reset an electronic fuse module by using RSLogix 5000 software This appendix provides an example of how to reset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000 software In addition to performing run time services you can use ladder logic to change configuration Chapter 7 explained how to use the RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix digital I O module Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic In ladder logic you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to any ControlLogix I O module Message instructions send an explicit service to the module causing specific behavior to occur For example unlatching a high alarm can be performed by a message instruction Message instructions maintain the fol
116. OK to set the path Message Configuration Slot4_ChO_Reset_Fuse TEE PEE E ra Configuration Communication Tag Pan Sc BAB Slot4 DASD Communication EIL YEEEETTN ETT TERT Path Sia OABSD Slot4_OA8D C Connected amp amp 1 0 Configuration 2 89 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fi 1 1756 HSC B HSC Module 4 1756 DA8D Slot4 DASD O Enable OE ffa 8 1756 L63 L63_New_Controller Eror Co Error Path Error Text Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 219 Appendix C 220 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Standard and Diagnostic 1 0 Modules This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for standard and diagnostic digital I O modules The Change of State timestamp can be used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on the time that the input transitions The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules In the example below the output follows the state of input 0 but it is delayed by exactly 10 ms The advantage of using CST over timers is that the synchronization is performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronizat
117. OL Enable PWM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current Connection Data PWM configuration 0 PWM is disabled default 1 PWM is enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer 193 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags continued Name Pt x PWMExtendCycle Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output behavior when the value in the Pt x PWMOnTime output tag is less than the value in the Pt x PWMMinimunOnTime configuration tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On time the output remains Off and the cycle does not extend Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer
118. OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Not Used Not Used y T ir Mae te Group 0 le OUT ControlLogix rH Backplane 1 Lo ae RIN Interface Display Output Verify No Load C a Gee m Ty d gan gan o da X c dn amp d nm 2c Surge Current Chart Surge 4A C 1 C 1 GND 1 GND 1 Not Used Group 1 My N N N N N N HI Continuous 30 C 86 F a 2A Current aa Continuous 60 C 140 F Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 0 10 ms Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 157 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B16E ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V electronically fused output module Simplified Schematic 1756 OB16E Display Optoisolation DC 0 5 o OUT iG ie OUT 0 m 7 R T N F E 4l J Group 0 OUT 3 E IEB OUT 2 Group 0 J dL SY e E 3 4 1 OUTO Daisy Chain to DUS i Ies 0UT 4 d Other RTB LRL 5 iain o IE GS oure ControlLogix Electronic Fuse RTN Tani Backplane Circuitry OUT 0 DC 0 3 ie RTN OUT 0
119. Off Follow these steps to enable no load detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 _ Enable Diag SRI Vv 2 XI SI XI XI SII XI SI NISI SI XI SII NISI D D p E r z R EH 2 S R S R xj R T F EH 2 S R Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the No Load column s To enable the feature for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable the feature for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B Field side Output Verification Field side output verification informs you that logic side instructions consumed by the module are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device For each output point this feature confirms that the output is On when it is commanded to be On The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a command and whether the field side device connected to the module has executed the command For example in applications that need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor s instructions
120. OffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On Triggers an event in the controller for Off to On transition of input point and causes the 1 bit per point input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable DiagCOSDisable BOOL Diagnostic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp as 1 bit per point soon as the diagnostic data changes state FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault If enabled for a point any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state even if the fault no 1 bit per point longer exists until you clear the fault 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FieldPwrLossEn DINT Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Tag Definitions Appendix B Table 35 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags continued Name Data Type Definition FilterOnOff 0 7 SINT Filter Time On to Off Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups of 1 byte per group eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms Filter ffOn 0 7 SINT Filter Time Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups of 1 byte per group eight points Valid DC
121. On or Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x Fault BOOL Quality of Data after Fault Indicates whether input data for a faulted point is correct Connection Data or Listen Only or incorrect Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOffOn BOOL New Data Off to On Captures short duration pulses for Off to On transitions A Connection Data or Listen Only captured pulse remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck Input Data Data or Timestamp Data output tag For more information see page 82 n 0 No new Off to On transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement Connection Data with Event or Listen 1 Anew Off to On transition has occurred but has not yet been acknowledged Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOff BOOL New Data On to Off Captures short duration pulses for On to Off transitions A pulse Connection Data or Listen Only remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tag For more Input Data Data or Timestamp Data information see page 82 m 0 No new On to Off transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement Connection Data with Event or Listen 1 Anew On to Off transition has occurred but has not yet been acknowledged Only with Event Input Data Time
122. Simplified Schematic ControlLogix Opto and Transformer Isolation u Backplane 7 Interface MAC EA P Short GATE H P y 0 us OUT o Display Loss of Field Power Surge Current Chart 20A Surge E 3 2A Time 43 ms Group 0 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Group 1 Not Used 1756 0A8E Iur o G 2 GG e E E Io H rj S CB GE KB EB 6 D OH G3 ED 07 See Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 D Group 1 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 151 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0416 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A16 f L1 0 ControlLogix 5 Backplane oy es OUT 1 I OUT 0 Interface T E E 3 Ies Loo x 7 L RD ous HES d our MN Daisy Chain OUT 5 3 Ia OUT 4 Group 0 Fused per Group to Other T U a Display 6 RTBs OUT 7 ie ie OUT 6 H L m AN IE d cms Z L1 0 I L2 0 IM E m S L LY AN 1 bz OUTO OUT 9 a ice OUT 8
123. Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data event Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer 198 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 49 1756 0B16IEF Module Output Data Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x Data BOOL Data lIndicates the On Off state to apply to the output point Connection Data 0 Off Output Data Data or Scheduled 1 0n per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data when Connection Data the bit transitions from Offto On Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverrideOutputEn BOOL Override Output Overrides local output data for peer logic with the value defined in Connection Peer Ownership the Pt x OverrideOutputValue tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverrideOutputValue BOOL Overr
124. User Manual Allen Bradley ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Numbers 1756 IA8D 1756 1A16 1756 1A161 1756 1432 1756 1816 1756 IB16D 1756 1B161 1756 IB16IF 1756 1832 1756 1C16 1756 1616 1756 1H161 1756 1M161 1756 IN16 1756 1V16 1756 1V32 1756 OA8 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8E 1756 0416 1756 0A161 1756 088 1756 OB8EI 1756 0881 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 08161 1756 OB16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS 1756 0B1615 1756 0B32 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 0N8 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E 1756 OW16l 1756 0X81 Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this equipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or applic
125. WMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns Connection Data On Output Data Data or Scheduled Ifthe corresponding bit in the Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles tag is set the configured per Module number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off or e Ifthe corresponding bit in the Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared the configured Connection Peer Ownership number of cycles occur only if the output remains On For example ifthe cycle limitis 4 Output Data Data with Peer and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle does not occur The default cycle limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable tag 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output Connection Data to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Valid values per Module 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or or Connection Peer Ownership 0 100 percent Output Data Data with Peer OutputMap x AndToControllerData INT Controller Data with AND Logic Determines the output state
126. Word All Modules Fast Module Features Chapter 5 ControlLogix fast input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller All input modules maintain a Module Fault word the highest level of fault reporting Modules configured to use the Data with Event connection format also maintain an Event Fault word to report on the status of an event connection Table 22 lists the fault words and associated tags you can examine in program logic to indicate when a fault or event has occurred for a fast input module Table 22 Fault Words on Fast Input Modules Word Input Tag Name Description Module Fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules Event Fault E Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules that use the Data with Event or Listen Only with Event connection format All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IB16IF module has a Module Fault word of 32 bits Table 23 Bits Set in Module Fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix fast digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0
127. a Scheduled Output Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset Listen Only CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data This choice has the same definition as CST timestamped fuse data output data except that it is a Listen only connection 1756 0A16 1756 OA8E 1756 0B16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E Full Diagnostics Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Listen Only Full Diagnostics Output Data This format has the same definition as Full diagnostics output data except that it is a Listen only connection 1756 0A8D 1756 0B16D Scheduled Output Data per Point The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value 1756 0B161S only 1 The 1756 0B16IS module does not support the Rack optimization Listen only rack optimization and Scheduled output data communication formats Table 29 Output Module Connection Formats Connection Format Output Data Data Return Module Data Data The owner controlle
128. act Match keying in the I O configuration take additional action depending on your version of RSLogix 5000 software If you use Exact Match keying and Then do this RSLogix 5000 software version 13 04 00 and 1 Delete the 2 x module from the 1 0 Configuration in the later RSLogix 5000 software project 2 Add a new 3 x revision module to the 1 0 configuration RSLogix 5000 software version 12 06 00 and Do one of the following earlier e Change the module s configuration to Disable Keying Upgrade RSLogix 5000 software to version 13 04 00 or later and complete the steps listed for RSLogix software version 13 04 00 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Cable Overview Asan alternative to buying RTBs and connecting the wires yourself you can buy a wiring system that connects to I O modules through prewired and pretested cables IMPORTANT The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency The combinations include the following s Interface modules IFMs mount on DIN rails to provide the output terminal blocks for the I O module Use the IFMs with the prewired cables that match th
129. al Chassis Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Remote Input Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis connected by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system guarantees that the owner controller receives data at least as often as the specified RPI As shown in the illustration below the input data within the remote chassis is multicast at the configured RPI The ControINet communication module sends input data back to the owner controller at least as often as the RPI Figure 3 Remote Input Modules on ControlNet Network Remote Chassis ooo o ood o 200 ooo noo ooo G Multicast Data oos ControlNet Network 40947 The module s RPI and reserved spot on the network are asynchronous to each other This means the
130. ancel Apply Help 2 Do the following in the Enable Change of State column e To enable the input module to send new data to the owner controller at the RPI on input COS if it is enabled and if a diagnostic fault occurs check the corresponding Off gt On or On gt Off checkbox for a point e To disable the feature clear the corresponding checkbox for a point Real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled 3 Click OK 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 Open Wire Detection Open Wire is used to verify the field wiring is connected to the module The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function properly A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open For more information see each module s specifications in Chapter 8 When an Open Wire condition is detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point fault This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault Follow these steps to configure open wire detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab R Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configurat
131. apter 3 The following Electronic Keying options are available Keying Option Description Compatible Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the Module installed device can emulate the defined device With Compatible Module you can typically replace a device with another device that has the following characteristics Same catalog number Same or higher Major Revision e Minor Revision as follows Ifthe Major Revision is the same the Minor Revision must be the same or higher Ifthe Major Revision is higher the Minor Revision can be any number Disable Keying Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a device With Disable Keying communication can occur with a device other than the type specified in the project ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying If you use Disable Keying you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the device being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application Exact Match Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication If any attribute does not match precisely communication with the device does not occur Carefully consider the implications of each keyi
132. are damage is not possible An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 Ladder commands output to be On Ladder commands output to be Off 1 2 1 Pulse Test fails Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off Fuse Blown bit is set Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as off Pulse Test fails KA A Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 No Load bit is set 3 Pulse Test passes The following table lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module Table 10 1756 0B16D Point level Fault Scenarios Possible cause of fault Output is shorted to GND One ofthe following could be the cause 1 No Load 2 Output shorted to DC 3 No power at module SUE Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as 00 2 Output Verify sets a bit Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off Pulse Test fails KA A Hardware point damage 9 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cutout principal In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cutout tempe
133. as been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTB catalog numbers 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Table 1 ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules continued Cat No Description Page 1756 0B16E 10 31 2V DC 16 point electronically fused output module 158 1756 0B16l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated output module 161 1756 0B16lEF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control output module 162 1756 OB16lEFS 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast scheduled per point output module 163 1756 0B16lS 10 30V DC scheduled isolated output module 164 1756 0832 10 31 2V DC 32 point output module 165 1756 0C8 30 60V DC 8 point output module 166 1756 0616 Transitor transitor logic TTL output module 167 1756 0H81 90 146V DC 8 point isolated output module 168 1756 ON8 10 30V AC 8 point output module 169 1756 0V16E 10 30V DC 16 point electronically fused sinking current output module 170 1756 0V32E 10 30V DC 32 point electronically fused sinking current output module 171 1756 OW16l 10 265V 5 150V DC 16 point isolated contact module 172 1756 0X8l 10 265V 5 150V DC8 point isolated contact
134. at drive high power loads by preventing the outputs from turning On simultaneously Enabling the Stagger Output option for multiple output points addresses surges by staggering the leading edge of those outputs Figure 17 When the Stagger Output feature is not enabled output points turn On immediately at the start of the cycle Figure 18 The stagger time for an output is calculated when the output turns On If the On time and cycle times are changed by large amounts while the output is On the stagger times may begin to overlap If the cumulative On time of staggered outputs is less than the cycle each new On transition is staggered to begin 50 us after the prior staggered output turns Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Figure 17 Outputs with Staggering Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Figure 18 Outputs without Staggering Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 99 Chapter5 bast Module Features PWM Configuration Follow these steps to configure PWM 1 Use program logic or the RSLogix 5000 tag editor to define the Cycle time and On time for an output point via the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B 2 On the Module Properties dialog box click the PWM Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 6 1756 OB16IEF 1 1 General
135. ata to the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module Updates are not performed at the end of the owner controller s tasks Whenever the module receives data from the controller it immediately multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and multicast back out onto the network This is called output data echo IMPORTANT inthis Producer Consumer model the output module is the consumer of the controller s output data and the producer of the data echo The owner controller updates ControlLogix digital output modules in the local chassis at the end of every task and at the RPI When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module you instruct the owner controller when to broadcast the output data to the module If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller as shown in the illustration below the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner controller sends it Backplane transfer times are small amp Figure 4 Local Output Modules age Oo oO oO oO oe tx CI 9 Data is sent at the end of o every task and at the RPI G 7 40949 Depending on the value of the RPI with respect to
136. ated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1756 1A32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D120A 2 Status indicating 120V AC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1756 IB16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IB16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 1492 IFM40F F24AD 4 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Status indicating Fusible Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage indicators four isolated groups and four terminals per input Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 x cable length 239 Appendix G 149
137. ation Controller v Digital lt Catalog Number Description Vendor Category 1756 4416 16 Point 79 132 AC Input Allen Bradley Digital 1756 4161 16 Point 79 132 AC Isolated Input Allen Bradley Digital 1756 1432 32 Point 74V 132V AC Input Allen Bradley Digital 17564A8D 8 Point 73 132V AC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley Digital 1756 1B16 16 Point 10 31 2 DC Input Allen Bradley Digital 1756 1B16D 16 Point 10 30Y DC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley Digital 175R IR1RI 1R Print TN 2TN DF Isolated Innut Sink Snuree Allen Rradleu Dinital vs lt gt 38 of 106 Module Types Found Add to Favorites Close on Create Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 125 Chapter 7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 126 To edit the module s configuration make sure the Open Module Properties checkbox is checked 3 On the Select Major Revision dialog box click OK to accept the default major revision Select Major Revision Select major revision for new 1756 IB16D module being created Major Revision C Ce 6 Onthe New Module dialog box complete the fields and click OK e For information about choosing an electronic keying method see page 40 e For information about choosing a communication format or connection type see page 130 The fields on the New Module dialog box vary depending on the catal
138. ation see the following e Configurable Point level Output States on page 51 e Programmable Fault State Delays on page 91 e Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles on page 95 You can modify the default PWM configuration for each of a module s 16 outputs for further control of an output s pulse train as described in PWM Configuration on page 100 Configuration options include the following e Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles as described below e Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output as described on page 96 Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles You can limit the number of pulse cycles that occur while an output is On This feature is useful when you want to apply a level of output control when a process is stopped For example in a gluing application you may want to apply 4 drops of glue to a product when the product is within a fixed window on a conveyor belt By configuring a cycle limit of 4 you can make sure that only 4 drops of glue are applied even if the conveyor belt stops with the product in the window Controlling the process with the Cycle Limit feature eliminates the need to write complex logic to detect a stopped conveyor belt Figure 14 shows a PWM pulse train configured with a cycle limit of 2 The PWMOCycleLimitDone input tag indicates when the PWM cycle limit has been reached The corresponding bit is reset upon the next rising edge of the output which restarts PWM Rockwell Automation Publica
139. ation of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence P IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people tha
140. ators vary by module catalog number as shown in Figure 26 on page 177 Table 32 Status Indicators for Output Modules Indicator Status Description OK Status Steady green The outputs are actively being controlled by a system processor Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled or it is inhibited or controller is in Program mode Uninhibit connection establish connection or transition controller to Run mode to enable communication to module Steady red The module must be replaced Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chassis communication 1 0 Status Yellow The output is On Fuse Status Red A short overload fault has occurred for a point in this group Check the wiring for a short overload Also check the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software and reset the fuse Fault Status Red The output has encountered a fault Check the output point at the controller DiagnosticStatus Steady red The output has encountered a fault Check the output point at the controller Flashing red The output is listening for peer inputs and using the inputs to determine the state of the output point Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1 0 Status Indicator pe st 01234567 Fuse Status Indicator j rust K Fault Status Indicator Bed FLT 012 3 4567 K Troubleshoot Your Mo
141. ault final state is Off If you chose Forever you cannot choose a final state The module retains its current Fault mode state 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Pulse Width Modulation Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Pulse Width Modulation PWM provides precise onboard control of an output s pulse train with no program variability To configure a PWM signal you define two real time values for the pulse train in the module s output tags s Cycle time The duration of a pulse cycle in seconds from 1 ms 1 hour e Ontime The pulse width or length of time that a pulse is active within a cycle from 200 ys 1 hour You can define the On time in seconds or as 0 100 percent of the cycle time You may want to use a steady state On time such as for gluing applications or a dynamic On time that is defined by program logic If the cycle time or On time is outside the valid range for an output the corresponding bit in the Fault input tag is set and the module responds as described below Condition PWMCydeTime lt minimum of 1ms Result PWMCycleTime 1 ms PWMCydeTime gt maximum of 1 hour PWMCydeTime 1 hour PWMCycleTime lt PWMOnTime Output is always On PWMOnTime lt minimum of 200 ys Output is always Off PWMOnTime gt maximum of 1 hour PWMOnTime 1 hour If the cycle time or On time value changes while the output is generating a PWM signal th
142. by applying AND logic Connection Peer Ownership to these sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from the controller s output data 0 Data Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToControllerData INT Controller Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying ORlogicto Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from the controller s output data 0 Data Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerlnput INT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from peer input data I Data Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToPeerlnput INT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership Sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from peer input data I Data Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerWindowO SINT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from window 0 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow0 Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap
143. c 5DC 15K VAN 1K 74HCT14 WV IN D E 15K AN RIS 1K T MHT So WR xc WA a gt DC COM gt e e 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 IN 0 GND 0 1756 1H16l ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated input module Simplified Schematic 35V c a c ub d ControlLogix Display Backplane Interface Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 1756 1H161 Maas DC 0 o GND 0 92 19 Isolated GND 1 4 3 Wiring GND 2 ale 56 DC 3 o GND 3 es GND 4 10 9 D GND 5 epu ug g GND 6 Je 14 13 D DC 7 0 GND 7 CD 16 15 d Jumper Bar GND 8 ITB 17 g Cut to Length GND 9 D20 19 G lo GND 10 g2 21 8 Nonisolated GNU D24 23 Q Wiring GND 12 26 25 G GND 13 28 27 H GND 14 D30 29 CD Dc GND 15 D 32 31 GND 15 34 33 D rd NotUsed Dae as CD I v Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams N 1 N 2 N 4 N 5 N 6 N 8 N 9 N 11 N 12 N 14 N 15 Not Used Not Ysed N40 o 3 o N43 o o 4 Chapter 8 NO o o o DCO0 4 NA
144. c output modules There is no Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions checkbox on the Configuration tab to check or clear for diagnostic output modules Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault and status data to between Input Modulesand owner controller or listening controller All diagnostic input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules Controllers use additional words to indicate fault conditions The following table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input module Table 12 Fault Words on Diagnostic Input Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules Field Power Loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates loss of field power to a group on the module Available on the 1756 IA8D only For more information see Field Power Loss Detection on page 70 Open Wire OpenWire Indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module For more information see Open Wire Detection on page 69 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits 0 15 are used in the
145. c information for the 1756 0G16 module Added features and module specific information for th e 1756 0V32E module Added a section about electronic keying with examples of Exact Match Compatible and Disabled Keying options Added new digital 1 0 specifications Added requirements for firmware updates for Major Revision 3 x Updated information on Interface Modules IFMs and prewired cables that are available with digital 1 0 modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 broadcast change of state COS communication format compatible match connection coordinated system time CST direct connection disable keying download electronic keying exact match field side inhibit interface module IFM listen only connection major revision Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Glossary Data transmissions to all addresses or functions Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an I O module Format that defines the type of information transferred between an I O module and its owner controller This format also defines the tags created for each I O module An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor and catalog number In this case the minor revision of the module must be greater than or equal to that of the configured slot The com
146. cent Table 52 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output Connection Data Output Data Data Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set Output Data Scheduled per 0 No fault Point 1 Fault Or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Data BOOL Data lIndicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point If PWM is Connection Data enabled this value does transition from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Scheduled per 0 off Point 1 0n or Connection Listen Only Output Data None FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition Connection Data for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset Output Data Scheduled per 0 Fuse is not blown Point 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset or Connection Listen Only Output Data None CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tIndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data time master on the backplane Output Data Scheduled per 0 CIP Sync is not available Point 1 CIP Sync is available or Connection Listen Only Output Data None 204 Rockwell Automation Pub
147. ckwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Data with Peer 197 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags continued Name Pt x PeerWindow10verrideStatus Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Peer Window 1 Override Status lIndicates whether peer window 1 data mapped to the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow Value output tag Requires the 0 Pt x OverridePeerWindow1En output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer window 1 is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer window 1 is enabled Module Definition Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Connection Data value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterlD Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP
148. configuration occurs on a per point basis but all module data is multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs IMPORTANT You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe the module still multicasts data at the rate specified by the RPI For example if an input is changing state consistently every two seconds and the RPI is set at 750 ms the data transfer looks like the illustration 500 750 1250 1500 1750 1 I 1 1 D l 1 1 D I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 l I f 2250 2500 2750 l I I I I I i I 1 1 I 1 i ji 1 1Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 41381 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 27 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 28 Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan it is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution The point must be buffered to prevent this from occurring To buffer the point you can copy the input data from your input tags to another structure and use the data from there TIP To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth use a larger RPI value if COS is enabled and the module is in the same chassis as its owner controller Trigger Event Tasks When configured Cont
149. configured to be owner controllers of the same input module Figure 6 Identical Owner Controller Configurations for Input Module Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX 34 gt A ZG Input 2 Initial Configuration S E C H Y ae xm Input Module Configuration Data 9 A B XXXXX b XXXXX R XXXXX a S 41056 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners Initial Configuration Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 As soon as a controller receives its user program it tries to establish a connection with the input module A connection is established with the controller whose configuration data arrives first When the second controller s configuration data arrives the module compares it to its current configuration data which was received and accepted from the first controller If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by the first controller that connection is also accepted If any parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or via program logic The advantage of multiple owners ov
150. cycle Connection Listen Only 1 The PWM cycle limit has been reached Output Data None Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tIndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data time master on the backplane Output Data Data 0 CIP Sync is not available or 1 CIP Sync is available Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout lIndicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Data 0 A valid time master has not timed out or 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed Connection Listen Only out The module is currently using its local clock Output Data None LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Connection Data value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None 206 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 53 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Data Output or Listen Only Connections continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterlD Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data
151. d in Run mode Pt x Data BOOL Data Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point If PWM is Connection Data enabled this value transitions from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Off per Module 1 0n or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x Fault BOOL Fault Indicates whether 1 0 data for the corresponding point may be incorrect due toa Connection Data fault Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 No fault per Module 1 A fault exists and 1 0 data may be incorrect or Any of these conditions set the bit for this tag Connection Listen Only Pt x FuseBlown 1 Output Data None Pt x PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds or Pt x PWMOnTime outside the valid range of 0 0002 3600 0 seconds Connection Peer Ownership SU 100 percent Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMCycleTime lt Pt x PWMOnTime 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags continued Name Pt x FuseBlown Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Fuse Is Blown Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset 0 Fuse is not blown 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset Tag Definitions Appendix B
152. d optimize the allocation of network bandwidth Internal Module Operation ControlLogix I O modules experience signal propagation delays that must be accounted for during operation Some of these delays are user configurable and some are inherent to the module hardware For example there is a small delay typically less than 1 ms between when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and when a signal is sent to the system over the backplane This time reflects a filter time of 0 ms fora DC input This section offers an explanation of the time limitations with ControlLogix I O modules Input Modules As shown in the illustration below ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the RTB and process it internally through hardware filters and an ASIC scan before sending a signal to the backplane via the requested packet interval RPI or at a Change of State COS occurrence The RPI is a configured interval of time that determines when a module s data is sent to the controller Hardware Delay Filter Delay ASIC Delay dicm OL Signal Applied Signal Sent to om atthe RTB i the Backplane Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 21 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on an I O module Delay Description Hardware How the module is
153. de Limit Description Check the checkbox to let only a fixed number of pulse cycles occur See Figure 14 on page 96 By default the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is cleared and pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off 1756 0B16IEF Tag Name CPt x PWMCycleLimitEnable 1756 0B16IEFS Tag Name CPWM CydeLimitEnable Cycle Limit Enter the maximum number of pulse cycles you want to occur on each output logic transition when Enable Cycle Limit is checked Ifyou check the Execute All Cycles checkbox below the specified number of cycles occur even if the Data output tag turns Off before the completion of the specified number of cycles Ifyou clear the Execute All Cycles checkbox below the specified number of cycles occur only if the Data output tag remains On for a sufficient amount of time for the specified number of cycles For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle does not occur This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked By default the cycle limit is 10 Valid values are 1 27 CPt x PWMCycleLimit CPWM CycleLimit Execute All Cycles 102 Check the checkbox to always execute the number of cycles specified in the Cycle Limit field even if the Data output tag turns Off For example if you specify a cycle limit of 2 and the output turns Off after 1 cycle the second cycle still occurs despite the
154. dule Appendix A Figure 26 Output Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number 1756 0A16 N AC OUTPUT 8 0 ST 89101112 1314 15 amp HIS e 1756 0A8D N AC OUTPUT ST 01234567 0 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 0B16E 1756 0V16E DC OUTPUT ST 01234567 0 FUSE K H ST 8 910 1112 13 1415 FUSE 6 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B16IEFS DC OUTPUT ST 0 3 ST 89 10 11 12 1314 15 FIT 89 10 11 12 1314 15 6 SCHEDULED 1756 0B8EI amp Dc OUTPUT ST 01234567 0 FUSEO 12 3456 7 K 6 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED OK Status Indicator 1756 0A161 N 4 AC OUTPUT S 01234567 Q ST 8910111213 1415 K 1756 0A8E N amp ACOUTPUT 8 01234567 FUSEO 12 3456 7 qa 0 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B161 1756 0B161S 1756 0G16 N amp DCOUTPUT 801234567 KO ST 8 910 111213 1415 1756 0832 1756 0V32E 4 DC OUTPUT 1012345 67 111111 012345 711112222 3167890123 ST 2 22 22 E T4567 8901 ST 89 rd 8 1756 OW16l RELAY OUTPUT 3 ST01234567 0 a ST 8 910 111213 1415 Rockwell Auto
155. e fault or the removal of the module from the chassis while under power RSLogix 5000 software monitors fault status bits to annunciate module failures Rack optimized Connections When a digital I O module is in a remote chassis with respect to its owner controller you can choose Rack Optimization or Listen only Rack Optimization during module configuration The option you choose depends on the communication module configuration If the communication module uses Listen only Rack Optimization then the I O module must also use Listen only Rack Optimization A rack optimized connection economizes bandwidth between owner controllers and digital I O modules in the remote chassis Rather than having several direct connections with individual RPI values an owner controller has a single rack connection with a single RPI value That RPI value accommodates all digital I O modules in the remote chassis Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 8 IMPORTANT Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Because rack optimized connections are applicable only in applications that use a remote chassis you must configure the communication format as described in Chapter 7 for both the remote 1 0 module and the remote 1756 CNB module or EtherNet IP module Make sure you configure both modules for rack optimization If you choose a different communication format for each module the controller makes two connecti
156. e refer to this example Value used in this example Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V AC 60 Hz 2 3 Poles Inrush 1225VA Sealed 45VA 2 Determine the number of motor starters required for your application 11 size 3 motor starters 3 Choose a ControlLogix digital output module 1756 0A161 Output voltage 74 265V AC Output steady state current per point 2A maximum 30 C 86 F amp 1A maximum 60 C 140 F Linear derating e Output steady state current per module 5A maximum 30 C 86 F amp 4A maximum 60 C linear derating Output surge current p 20A maximum for 43 ms repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F 4 Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature 50 C 122 F 5 Confirm the voltage range is within the motor starter range Motor starter uses 120V AC 1756 0A16l operates in a 74 120V AC voltage range 6 Confirm the inrush current per point Inrush of motor starter Line voltage Inrush current 1225VA 120V AC 10 2 A Inrush 7 Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the motor starter Sealed Line voltage Steady state current 45VA 120V AC 0 375 A 50 C 122 F Output point current can drive 2 A 033 Ax 20 C 2 A 0 66 A 1 34 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F output point derates to 033 mA C point derating The 1756 0A161 output point current 1 34 A can drive the motor star
157. e I O module to the interface module 1 0 Module Prewired Cable IFM e Prewired cables are individually color coded conductors that connect to a standard terminal block The other end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module All ofthe prewired cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 237 AppendixG 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Additional prewired cable combinations include the following e Digital I O module ready cables with free connectors wire into standard terminal blocks or other type of connectors The other end ofthe cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module 1 0 Module Prewired Cable with Free Connectors Terminal Block Most of the I O module ready cables use 0 823 mm 18 AWG conductors for higher current applications or longer cable runs s IFM ready cables have a cable connection to attach to the IFM prewired to one end The other end has free connectors to wire to I O modules or other components Components IFM ready Cable IFM The IFM ready cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire Table 65 on page 239 lists the IFMs and prewired cables that can be used with ControlLogix digital I O modules IMPORTANT Forthe latest list see the Digital Analog Programmable Controller Wiring Systems Technical Data publication 1492 TD008 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015
158. e Module Definition dialog box lil Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16IF 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Status Offline Input Filter Time us Dun 0 15 02 U C Latch Timestamps ESTESTEST EST ESTIS ISTISTISTISTISTITISTISTISTIST E rDppnppapapaYpYpYpp a aaa SJSTESTESTISTIS T ISTIST IST ISTISTIS ISTIS 4 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description Configuration Tag Enable COS Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition fora Pt x COSOffOnEn Off On point check the corresponding checkbox To disable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Enable COS Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition fora Pt x COSOnOffEn On Off point check the corresponding checkbox To disable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Latch Timestamps Check the checkbox to latch a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS LatchTimestamps transition Whenaninitial timestamp is latched timestamps for subsequent COS transitions are dropped e Once a latched timestamp is acknowledged via the corresponding bit in the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck tag the timestamp is overridden upon the next COS transition IMPORTANT Timestamps are latched only for points that a
159. e changes are not applied until the next cycle of the PWM output For instance if the cycle time is erroneously set to an hour a new cycle time does not go into effect until the last cycle of the hour is complete To trigger the PWM output to restart immediately with a new cycle time or On time turn the output Off and then back On EXAMPLE If PWMOnTime is 0 1 second and PWMCycleTime is 1 0 second and the PWMCydeTime is changed to 0 5 second just after the output turns On the output stays on for 0 1 second and then turns Off for 0 9 seconds to complete the cycle before the new 0 5 second cycle begins IMPORTANT Before PWM functions you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags If PWM is enabled PWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 93 Chapter5 bast Module Features Figure 12 compares two applications in which the output is instructed to turn On for 4 5 seconds e Inthe application without PWM a single pulse is generated The pulse remains active for the same length of time the Data output tag is On 4 5 seconds e Inthe application with PWM a series of pulses are generated Each pulse is active for a configured On time of 5 seconds or 5096 of the 1 second cycle time The Data output tag is On for 4 5 seconds Figu
160. e diagnostics for field power loss 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OABE 3 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane Point Output State During Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Latching n ott vlot Off ott Off lott Off lott Off v ott Off v ott Off lott Off EIS M M Iv Iv v M p M r M S M Li M Li M Lele hes Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Doone of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss column s To enable field power loss detection for a specific point check the corresponding check box s To disable field loss detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Diagnostic Latch of Information The diagnostic latch feature is available for the 1756 OA8E modules only Diagnostic latching lets this module latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Enable Diag Latching Z z v
161. e fault conditions The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard output module Table 6 Fault Words on Output Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules Fuse blown FuseBlown Indicates a point group fuse blown on the module Available only on 1756 0A16 1756 0A8D 1756 OA8E 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 0B16EIF 1756 OB8EI 1756 OV16E and 1756 0V32E modules For more information see Electronic Fusing on page 53 Field power loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module Available on the 1756 OA8E module only For more information see Field Power Loss Detection on page 56 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a eight point module only the first eight bits 0 7 are used in the module fault word Fault bits in the fuse blown word and field power loss word are logically entered into the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the following table Table 7 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regard
162. e module s ASCII text string and the length of the text string in bytes Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The table defines the values returned for each rung Table 60 Rung Values Rung Module ID Retrieved Description 1 Product Type Modules product type 7 Digital 1 0 10 Analog 1 0 Catalog Code Modules catalog number 2 Major Revision Module major revision Minor Revision Modules minor revision 3 Status Modules status Multiple bits listed Bit 0 0 Unowned 1 Owned Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 0 Unconfigured 1 Configured Bit 3 Reserved Bits 7 4 Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned outputs in Program mode 4 Unused 5 Internal fault need flash update 6 Run mode 7 Program mode output mods only Bit 8 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 9 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 11 0 No fault 1 Major unrecoverable fault Bits 15 12 Unused 4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor 1 Allen Bradley Serial Number Module serial number 5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Modules ASCII text string description Review of Tags in Ladder Logic W
163. e to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth 4 A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of two fuses The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit conditions The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse does not blow and the output device associated with that channel is damaged To provide overload protection for your application install user supplied fuses externally 5 Ifa short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module s group the entire group is turned Off 6 The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources 7 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output channels that are affected by this phenomena continues to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels must be checked and res
164. ection Data value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterlD Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID lndicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data event Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Schedule State SINT Schedule State Indicates the current sequence number of schedules stored in the Connection Data output data Output Data Scheduled per Point Schedule SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number The data echo indicating the sequence number of the Connection Data schedule Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Scheduled per Point 205 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 53 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Data Output or Listen Only Connections Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status
165. ed depth housing catalog number 1756 T BE For more information see page 116 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Assemble the Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring connections when the RTB is seated on the module Parts of the catalog number 1756 TBCH RTB example below are identified in the table Terminal Block and Housing 20858 M Item Description Housing cover 2 Groove 3 Side edge of RTB RB 5 Strain relief area Follow these steps to attach the RTB to the housing 1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB 2 Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place IMPORTANT _ If additional wire routing space is required for your application use extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 115 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Choose Extended depth Housing 116 There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your ControlLogix digital I O module standard depth or extended depth When you order an RTB for your I O module you receive standard depth housing If your application uses heavy gauge wiring you can order extended depth housing Extended depth housing does not come with an RTB Standard depth Housing Extended depth Housi
166. em To prevent other owner controllers from receiving potentially erroneous data use these steps when changing a modules configuration in a multiple owner scenario while online 1 For each owner controller inhibit the connection to the module either in the software on the Connection tab or the message dialog box warning you of the multiple owner condition 2 Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software For more information about using RSLogix 5000 software to change the configuration see Chapter 7 3 Repeatstep 1 and step 2 for all owner controllers making the exact same changes in each Clear the Inhibit checkbox in each owner controller configuration 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 3 Common Module Features Topic Page Input Module Compatibility 37 Output Module Compatibility 38 Common Features 39 Common Features Specific to Input Modules 46 Common Features Specific to Output Modules 50 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 60 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 61 Input Module Compatibility ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are On or Off ControlLogix input modules convert AC or DC On Off signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include the following e Proximity s
167. ensities 705 ee eee 50 Common Features Specific to Output Modules eee 50 Configurable Point level Output States ese ee e eee ee 51 Output Data Echo see 52 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules 52 Multiple Output Point Densities eee 53 Electronic Fusing nec Yr aa Pm e E UI E qe Pons 53 Field Power Loss Detection sse 56 Diagnostic Latch of Information e esses 57 Time scheduled Output Control 0 cee eee eee eee 59 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers nccodsustaGeauk Ft xcs tune oean eee LE AE 60 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controlletsc ires cete ere Sd ERI even bte E PP PRSE 61 Chapter 4 Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility esses 63 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 0 008 64 Diagn sti POACHRERS cd Paso ve una ha Pn de petu tis 64 Diagnostic Latch of Information cesset tenete eases 64 Diagnostic Timestattipr is cere roto heir xd d des o mann e vu dept 65 8 Point AC 16 Point DC s dioi dete a ee erede hey 66 PointJevel Fault Reporting cete pr S po PR UE EY REN PES 66 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules sese 67 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 67 Open Wire ete cobi a6 perice tea ter cet elite e etch cde 69 Field Power Loss Detection 52 err qu eR ES S 70 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules
168. ent task when input points 0 3 are in the On state and input points 12 15 are in the Off state Table 21 Example Pattern 4 Output Tag Bit Position Event x Mask Event x Value Once you define a pattern you can disable an event from being triggered without clearing its output data by using the Event x Disarm output tag IMPORTANT All event masks and event values must be defined in the module s output tags You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module operation continues or through the RSLogix 5000 tag editor For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B To use a dedicated connection to trigger event tasks you must set the module s connection format to Data with Event as shown in Figure 11 For more information about connection formats see Communication or Connection Formats on page 127 TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating a new module except when you are online The AOP applies all the configuration data required for the new connection format Figure 11 Event Connection Format Module Definition Series NN v Revision 1 Ww 1 L Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data With Event Input Data Timestamp Data Choose Data with Event from the Connection pull down menu Cancel Help When you choose the Data with Event connection format the following occurs e A second connection dedicated to even
169. er 6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Connect the Wires 110 3 Tokey the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions insert the straight wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first Module side of RTB 67 20851 M 4 Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops S Repeat step 1 step 4 by using additional U shaped and straight tabs until the module and RTB lock into each other properly You can use an RTB ora Bulletin 1492 prewired Interface Module IEM to connect wires to your module If you are using an RTB follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB IFMs are prewired prior to shipping an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding T WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on ATTENTION If multiple power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 1 The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 mm 22 16 AWG c
170. er 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module Simplified Schematic A 4A Current N gt t OUT 0 7 1 ControlLogix Backplane Interface Display Surge Current Chart Surge Continuous 30 C 86 F Continuous 60 C 140 F Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Isolated Wiring DC 0 o DC2 4 O Sinking Output Wiring DC 6 Ho Jumper Bar Cut to Length Nonisolated Wiring Daisy Chain to Other RTBs DC 0 DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 DC 5 DC 6 DC 7 DC 8 DC 9 DC 10 DC 11 DC 12 DC 13 DC 14 DC 15 DC 15 Not Use 1756 0B161 Isolated Sourcing Output Wiring O DC 0 M aT D o DC 2 SIS Oo oO K B 10 o DC6 J c c d X c Kca 03 L da R N A Hep ede gg a Nonisolated N a N a Sourcing Output Wiring oo 08 Oct UU amp amp C C Cc E GKM SO Not Used CO c OY LH E m H H ry E y ry d N A5 Not Used w BR w Q CH N H d DG Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 161 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B
171. er a Listen only connection is that either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the module continues to operate and multicast data to the system through the connection maintained by the other controller You must be careful when changing an input module s configuration data in a multiple owner scenario If the configuration data is changed in owner A and sent to the module that configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module Owner B continues to listen unaware that any changes have been made in the module s behavior as illustrated below Figure 7 Module Configuration Changes with Multiple Owners Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX Iz XXXXX gt A 9 Input a B Jnitial Configuration ST ne EAT Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX A B E Xxxxx S XXXXX J 41057 IMPORTANT A message in RSLogix 5000 software alerts you to the possibility of a multiple owner controller situation and lets you inhibit the connection before changing the module configuration When changing the configuration for a module with multiple owners we recommend the connection be inhibited Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 35 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix Syst
172. er output 1492 CABLExV x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs gth 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0A8E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D5120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLExV 1492 IFM20F FS 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 x cable length 241 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0A16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard HS 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120N Status indicating Narrow standard
173. erate Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Your application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 49 Chapter3 Common Module Features Common Features Specific to Output Modules 50 Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the input module from a field device The module receives information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix digital output modules IMPORTANT Some features are not available on all output modules The table indicates which modules support each feature Topic Page Available Modules Configurable Point level Output States 51 All modules Output Data Echo 52 All modules Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules 52 All modules Multiple Output Point Densities 53 All modules Electronic Fusing 53 1756 0A8D 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OB16IEF 1756 OB16IEFS 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E Field Power Loss Detection 56 1756 0A8E Diagnostic Latch of Information 57 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16IEF 1756 OB16IEFS Time scheduled Output Control 59 1756
174. erminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0N8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard aaah 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for output EL 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0V16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard ED 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1492 IFMs for Digital I O Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0V32E 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXZ 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals PESE 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM4
175. es Follow these steps to remove an RTB from the module 1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module 2 Open the RTB door by using the bottom tab 3 Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module IMPORTANT Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door A shock hazard exists 20855 M 120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Remove the Module Follow these steps to remove a module from its chassis from the Chassis 1 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs EET ER 20856 M 2 Pull module out of the chassis OA f zx ERAS EEN CUR f js E ANA C ENS ENS N 3 ER UNE 3S SESS KST EE LA UM ee SSE BOW SSS besa sN oss NN oss N H SSIs E SELL CZ d 20857 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 121 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Notes 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Topic Page Configuration ProcessOveiew Create a New Module 125 Edit the Configuration 130 Connection Properties 131 View and Change Module Tags 132 You must configure your module upon installation The module does not work until
176. et if a short circuit on one channel occurs 8 The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads In the event of a short circuit on an output channel it is likely that the transistor or relay associated with that channel is damaged and the module can be replaced or a spare output channel used for the load The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse does not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel is damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuse can be installed externally and properly sized to match the individual load characteristics 9 The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 You can reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring or through program logic running on a controller Ifyour module uses point level fusing you can reset a fuse with a CIP Generic Message instruction as described on page 225 Follow these steps to reset an e
177. ever you can define the value as 0 100 percent of the cycle time by dicking On Time in Percent below IMPORTANT Before PWM functions you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags If PWM is enabled C PWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On 0 Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal 0 Pt x PWMOnTime 0 PWM OnTime PWM Cycle Time view only Displays the duration of each pulse cycle as defined in the PWMCycleTime output tag This value is always displayed in seconds with a range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds IMPORTANT Before PWM functions you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags If PWM is enabled CPWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On 0 Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal O Pt x PWM CycleTime 0 PWM CycleTime Minimum On Time Type the minimum length of time required for the output to turn On This value must be defined in seconds For example if a heating coil requires a minimum of 2 seconds to heat up and you enter a value of 2 000 in this field the shortest pulse allowed is never less than 2 000 seconds The default value of zero disables the feature C Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime C PWM MinimumOnTime Extend Cycle to Accommodate Minimum On Time Check or clear this checkbox to determ
178. ewDataOnOffAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an Off state and resets the timestamp latch The Pt x TimestampDropped input tag indicates whether a new timestamp has not been recorded because a previous timestamp was either latched or unacknowledged Once a timestamp latch is reset for an input point a new timestamp may be recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn or Pt x Timestamp OnOff input tags upon the next transition You can configure per point timestamping in three Ways e Timestamping enabled without latching default configuration e Timestamping enabled with latching e Timestamping disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 83 Chapter 5 Fast Module Features 84 Follow these steps to configure per point timestamping and enable COS 1 On the New Module dialog box click Change to display the Module Definition dialog box E New Module General Connection Module Info Configuration Type 1756 IB16IF 16 Point 24V High Speed DC Isolated Input Sink Source Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Description Module Definition Revision 11 Module Definition Electronic Keying Compatible Module Data Series A Timestamp Data Connection Input Data Revision 1 v Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Input Data Timestamp Data Status Creating Opens t
179. f data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup s Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module IMPORTANT Thetable lists all possible standard and diagnostic input module tags In each application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 181 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 33 Standard Input Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an On to Off 1bit per point transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an event task in the controller 0 Disable 1 Enable COSOffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an Off to On 1 bit per point transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an event task in the controller 0 Disable 1 Enable FilteronOff 0 7 SINT Filter Times On to Off Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups 1 byte per group of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms Filteroff n 0 7 SI
180. f directly driving the ControlLogix diagnostic digital inputs When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information on the compatibility of motor starters with ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E The table below lists features common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules Diagnostic I O modules also have the common module features described in Chapter 3 ep Tans Diagnostic Timestamp 65 8 Point AC 16 Point DC 66 Point level Fault Reporting 66 Diagnostic Latch of Information Diagnostic latching lets diagnostic I O modules latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set diagnostic latching to occur for a specific point where the field device is wired to the I O module Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostic latching 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lll Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 v Open Wire 8 15 1ms v 1ms vl Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI SI SI XI XI XI XI XI XI v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 2 Do one of the following in
181. formation 14 WHO string length 1 SINT Device s ASCII text string describing the module WHO Information 15 WHO ascii string 32 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following table lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the message instructions Table 59 Source and Destination Field Tags Source Tag Description Enable 32 Points DINT Parameter used to determine which points are enabled for the service That is if bit 0 1 for Reset Fuse then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset Results 32 Points DINT Pass 0 Fail 1 result for the service That is if bit 0 1 for the results of the Reset Fuse then the Reset Fuse failed for point 0 If you are using RSLogix 5000 software version 10 07 00 or later choose the physical location slot number and data type in the Source Element and Destination fields Communication Tab The Communication tab provides information on the path of the message instruction For example the slot number of a 1756 OA8D module distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for IMPORTANT Use the Browse button to see a list of the 1 0 modules in the system You choose a path when you choose a module from the list You must name an 1 0 module during initial module configuration to choose a path for your message instruction Click
182. from any I O module such as input data echoed output data or echoed diagnostic information Even ifa controller does not own a module or hold the module s configuration data the controller can still listen to the module During the module configuration process you can specify one of several Listen modes For more information see Communication or Connection Formats on page 127 Choosing a Listen mode lets the controller and module establish communication without the controller sending any configuration data In this instance another controller owns the module being listened to IMPORTANT _InListen only mode controllers continue to receive data multicast from the 1 0 module as long as the connection between the owner controller and 1 0 module is maintained If the connection between the owner controller and module is broken the module stops multicasting data and connections to all listening controllers are also broken If a connection is lost between an owner controller and a module the connection is also lost between any controllers listening to that module As a result the ControlLogix system lets you define more than one owner controller for input modules IMPORTANT Onlyinput modules can have multiple owner controllers If multiple owner controllers are connected to the same input module they must maintain identical configurations for that module In the illustration below controller A and controller B both have been
183. ge 1756 0B16IEF Module 192 1756 0B16IEFS Module 200 1756 0B16IEF Module IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 OB16IEF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast output module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 The 1756 OB16IEF module uses array data structures Array data structures differ from the flat data structures of other digital I O modules For more information see Array Data Structures on page 209 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags Name ProgToFaultEn Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Program to Fault Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs remain in Program mode See Pt x FaultMode Pt x FaultValue Pt x ProgMode and Pt x ProgValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails Tag Definitions Appendix B Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Outpu
184. gix 5000 software and receive a Communication fault message the Connection tab lists the type of fault under Module Fault Wil Module Properties Local 8 1756 0B16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI poo ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0116 Electronic Keying Mismatch Major and or Minor revision invalid or incorrect Status Faulted Cancel Appl Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 179 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Notes 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags Appendix B Tag Definitions Topic Page Standard and Diagnostic Input ModuleTags a Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags 184 Fast Input Module Tags 187 Fast Output Module Tags 192 Array Data Structures 209 This appendix describes the tags that are used for standard diagnostic and fast input and output modules Module defined data types and tags are created when a module is initiated The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module and the communication or connection format chosen during configuration ControlLogix standard and diagnostic input modules have two types of tags s Configuration Structure o
185. gix output modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix 1 0 modules provide nonisolated field side wiring options each 1 0 module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 3 Recommended Fuses Circuit Type AC Common Module Features Chapter 3 Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the I O module from a device The I O gets information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs Electronic Fusing Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing Modules that use electronic fusing are fused on either a per point basis or per group basis to protect output points from the surge of too much current If too much current begins to flow through a point the fuse is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller A correspo
186. guration data for every module that it owns e Sends I O modules configuration data to define module behavior and begin module operation with the control system e Resides in a local or remote chassis in regard to the I O modules position Each ControlLogix I O module must continuously maintain communication with its owner controller to operate normally Typically each module in the system has only one owner controller Input modules can have more than one owner controller Output modules however are limited to a single owner controller For more information about using multiple owner controllers see Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners on page 35 The I O configuration within RSLogix 5000 software generates the configuration data for each I O module in the control system including modules in a remote chassis A remote chassis contains the I O module but not the module s owner controller A remote chassis can be connected to the controller via an EtherNet IP network or a scheduled connection on the ControlNet network Configuration data from RSLogix 5000 software is transferred to the controller during the program download and subsequently transferred to I O modules The I O modules in the local or remote chassis are ready to run as soon as the configuration data has been downloaded However to enable scheduled connections to I O modules on the ControlNet network you must schedule the network by using RSNe
187. gure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Create a New Module Before creating a new module make sure you complete these procedures in RSLogix 5000 software e Create a controller project e Ifyou plan to add the I O module to a remote chassis add ControlNet or EtherNet IP communication modules to both the local and remote chassis in the I O Configuration tree For more information on ControlLogix ControlNet modules see ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication_ CNET UMO001 For more information on ControlLogix EtherNet IP modules see EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMOOI IMPORTANT RSLogix 5000 software version 15 02 00 and later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 and later lets you add 1 0 modules online When using a previous version you must be offline to create a new module Follow these steps to add a local or remote I O module 1 To addan I O module to a local chassis right click the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module or To add an I O module to a remote chassis right click the remote communication module and choose New Module 2 On the Select Module Type dialog box select the digital module to create and then click Create Select Module Type c Catalog Module Discovery Favorites Clear Filters Hide Filters 4 Module Type Category Filters Module Type Vendor Filters Analog Allen Bradley Communic
188. hanges do not occur within 500 us of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500 us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Timestamping in Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature so that after conjunction with input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point actuates at some scheduled outputs configured time in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must do the following e Choose a communication or connection format for each input and output module that enables timestamping For more information refer to Communication or Connection Formats on page 127 e Have a time master in the same chassis as both 1 0 modules Disable COS for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped TIP For scheduled outputs to work most effectively remember the following items The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays e Thel 0 modules must reside in the same rack as the time master Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 43 Chapter 3 Common Module Features Use CIP Sync Time with Fast I 0 Modules The 1756 IB16IF 1756 OBIGIEF and 1756 OBIGIEFS module
189. he Module Definition dialog box OK Cancel 2 Use the table below to choose a connection format and input data type from the Connection and Input Data pull down menus IMPORTANT To enable timestamping choose Timestamp Data as the input data type Connection Format Input Data Data Return Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps This format is useful when the highest possible throughput is required and timestamps are not required Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time Connection to initiate event tasks See page 89 Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Data Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating a new module except when you are online The AOP applies all the configuration data and create the tags required for the new connection format Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 3 On the New Module or Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Timestamp fields only appear on the Configuration tab when you choose Timestamp Data from the Input Data pull down menu on th
190. he New Tag dialog box Field Description Name Type the tag name including the slot number in the module Description Type an option tag description Usage Use the default Type Use the default Alias for Leave blank Data Type Choose MESSAGE Scope Choose the Controller scope Note Message tags can be created only with the Controller scope External Access Use the default Style Leave blank Constant Leave blank Open MESSAGE Configuration 7 Click OK Leave the box blank if you do NOT want to automatically access the Message Configuration screen when OK is clicked You still can access the Message Configuration screen later by following the procedures on page 215 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Enter Message Configuration After creating a tag you must enter certain parameters for the message configuration This information is entered on the Configuration and Communication tabs of the Message Configuration dialog box The Message Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking the box with the ellipses in the Message Control field MSG Message EN Message Control Sk CHO Reset Fg II End IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 10 07 00 or later the Message Configuration dialog boxes changed significantly to make it easier for you to configure your messages
191. he code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x 005 0 5 m 010 1 0 m 025 2 5 m lengths are also available Table 67 Module Connectors Cat No 1492 CABLEXTBNH Vo of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter RTB at the 1 0 Module End 0 823 mm 18 AWG 11 4 mm 0 45 in 1756 TBNH 1492 CABLEXTBCH 492 14 1 mm 0 55 in 1756 TBCH 1 Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x 005 0 5 m 010 1 0 m 25 2 5 m 050 5 m Build to order cable 2 Four conductors are not connec 246 lengths are also available ed to the RTB Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 UM058F EN P April 2012 Appendix H History of Changes 1756 UM058F EN P April 2012 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 248 This appendix summarizes the revisions to this manual Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have been made across multiple revisions This can be especially useful if you are deciding to upgrade your hardware or software based on information added with previous revisions of this manual Change Updated the Electronic Keying section Updated the Attention text on RIUP support in the Install the Module section Updated the MainTas
192. hen you use tags in ladder logic applications remember these guidelines e Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis For example point 0 bit 0 on the module e Ifyou are performing a service through the tags a value of 0 prevents the action from occurring and a value of 1 causes the action to occur For example if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit enter 1 in the tags e Ifyou are checking the response of a service through the tags a value of 0 means the bit passed the service and a value of 1 means the bit failed the service For example if you perform a pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit the bit passed the test Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 229 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Notes 230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Choose a Correct Power Supply Appendix D Use the chart to determine the power your ControlLogix chassis is using to prevent an inadequate power supply We recommend that you use this worksheet to check the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used Slot Module Current Power Current Power Current Power Number Cat No 5 1V DC mA 5 1V DC Watts 24V DC mA 24V DC Watts 3 3V DC mA 3 3V DC Watts 0 x5 1V x24V x33V 1 x5 1V x24V x33V 2 x5 1V x24V x
193. high alarm on a particular channel that channels high high alarm unlatches but may be set on a subsequent channel sample The message instruction must then be re executed to unlatch the alarm a second time This section shows how to create a tag in ladder logic when adding a message instruction Ladder logic is in the main routine within RSLogix 5000 software Follow these steps to create a tag 1 Start the RSLogix 5000 software and open an existing I O project or create a new one 2 On the Controller Organizer double click MainTask Expand MainProgram to see Main Routine as a sub menu item fi RSLogix 5000 Controller Digital IO 1756 File Edit View Search Logic Communications aleg e sael o 7 Offline B P RUN ba T L L No Forces K m NoEds amp F 0 Redundancy Boy a Controller Controller Digital IO A Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler Tasks El fa MainTask E C MainProgram A Program Tags MainRoutine A graphic that looks like a ladder with rungs appears in the right side of the RSLogix 5000 software program You attach run time service such as a message instruction to the rungs and then download the information to a controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C You can tell that the rung is in Edit mode because of the
194. ide Output Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to all outputs mappedto Connection Peer Ownership the output point when the corresponding bit in the Pt x OverrideOutputEn tag is set Output Data Data with Peer 0 Off 1 0n Pt x OverridePeerlnputEn BOOL Override Peer Input Overrides peer input data mapped to the output point with the Connection Peer Ownership value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerInputValue output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerInputValue BOOL Override Peer Input Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to all peer inputs Connection Peer Ownership mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Pt x OverridePeerInputEn Output Data Data with Peer output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n Pt x OverridePeerWindowOEn BOOL Override Peer Window 0 Overrides peer window 0 inputs mapped to the output point Connection Peer Ownership with the value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerWindowOValue BOOL Override Peer Window 0 Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to peer window 0 Connection Peer Ownership inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerWindowOEn output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n Pt x OverridePeerWindow1En BOOL Override Peer Window 1 Overrides peer window
195. ill continue to be the product to program Logix5000 controllers for discrete process batch motion safety and drive based solutions Rockwell Software Studio 5000 Rockwell Anen Bradwy Rockwell Sotware Automation Copynght 2014 Rockwell Automation Technologees Inc x1 Thes program is protected by U S and intematornal copyright lows The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of Rockwell Automation engineering design tools and capabilities The Studio 5000 environment is the one place for design engineers to develop all ofthe elements of their control system Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 11 Preface For More Information 12 These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource Description 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Specifications Technical Data publication 1756 TD002 Provides specifications for ControlLogix 1 0 modules ControlLogix High speed Counter Module User Manual publication 1756 UM007 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the 1756 HSC counter module ControlLogix Low speed Counter Module User Manual publication 1756 UM536 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the 1756 LSC8XIB8I counter module ControlLogix Peer 1 0 Control Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 Describes typical peer control applications and provides
196. ine the output behavior when the On time is less than the minimum On time e Check the checkbox to increase the duration of the pulse cycle to maintain the On time to Cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time Note Extending the cycle time is typically useful only when the On time is a result of a calculation Clear the checkbox if you do not want to increase the duration of the pulse cycle In this case the output does not turn On if the On time is less than the minimum On time By default the checkbox is cleared and cycles do not extend CPt x PWMExtendCyde CPWM ExtendCycle Stagger Output to Adjust Cycle Phase to Minimize Simultaneous Outputs Check the checkbox to minimize the load on the power system by staggering output transitions See Figure 17 on page 99 By default this checkbox is cleared and staggering is disabled When staggering is disabled for an output point the output always turns On at the beginning of a pulse cycle CPt x PWMStaggerOutput CPWM StaggerOutput On Time in Seconds or On Time in Percent To define PWM On time in seconds click On Time in Seconds To define PWM On time as a percentage of the cycle time click On Time in Percent By default the On time is defined in seconds C Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 CPWM OnTimelnPercent 101 Chapter5 bast Module Features Field Enable Cy
197. ing bit for the Pri x NewDataOffOn or Pt x NewDataOnOff input tag This bit remains latched until acknowledged As a result you can use this bit to detect a transition that is too fast to be detected by the program scan You can also determine how rapid the transition was by configuring the module to latch timestamps for the point as described in Per Point Timestamping and Change of State on page 83 To acknowledge the last captured pulse and reset the pulse latch you set the rising edge of the corresponding bit in these output tags e Ptx NewDataOffOnAck A cknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an On state and resets the pulse latch s Pc x NewDataOnOffAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an Off state and resets the pulse latch You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module operation continues or through the RSLogix 5000 tag editor For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B Once a pulse latch is reset for an input point the next pulse at that point sets the corresponding bit in the Pt x NewDataOffOn or Pt x NewDataOnOff input tags Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Per Point Timestamping and Change of State With per point timestamping each input point on the module records timestamps in CIP Sync format at these speeds e 4 us for inputs lt 4 kHz e 13 us for inputs gt
198. int point 0 must have Change of State enabled Otherwise the timestamp does not update when the point transitions Once Change of State has been detected the value in the Delay tag is added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp using a COP instruction This causes the output module to apply its output at a time equal to the time that the input changed state plus the Delay time The final COP instruction updates LastInputTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state e Rung 4is the standard XIC OTE rung that controls the output point based on the input point The only difference is that the output module is configured for scheduled outputs The outputs are not applied until the scheduled time has occurred Local 2 1 Pt 0 Data Local 4 0 Pt 0 Data The Controller Tags dialog box below shows examples of the tags created in ladder logic Controller Tags ModuleScheduleUserManual controller Read Write Read Write nge JL Ii Read Write InputT imestamp Read Write LastinputT imestamp Read Write Read write Read Write Read Write Read write Read Wwite Read wiite Read Write 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test and Reset Latched Diagnostics The following ladder logic program shows how to use ladder
199. ion Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics for Input Fitter Time 2 b ite T Open Wire Off On On Off zh g z O 7 ims viim v 8 15 1ms vims xl M M Vv Vv r r r F r SESIT 11 TESTI UAM TNSESISISI 1717171717 TNI v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Doone of the following in the Open Wire middle column s To enable the open wire detection for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable open wire detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 69 Chapter 4 70 Diagnostic Module Features Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the 1756 IA8D module only When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you receive faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For information on these tags see Chapter A Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostics fo
200. ion FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs bet
201. ion 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Module Identification and Status Information What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification information that separates it from all other modules This information assists you in tracking all the components of your system For example you can track module identification information to know which modules are in any ControlLogix chassis at any time While retrieving module identity you can also retrieve module status Item Description Product type Module s product type such as digital 1 0 or analog 1 0 Product code Modules catalog number Major revision Modules major revision number Minor revision Module minor revision number Status Modules status including these items Controller ownership Whether the module has been configured Device specific status such as the following Self test Update in progress Communications fault Not owned outputs in Program mode Internal fault needs update Run mode Program mode outputs only Minor recoverable fault Minor unrecoverable fault Major recoverable fault Major unrecoverable fault Vendor Modules manufacturer vendor such as Allen Bradley Serial number Module serial number Length of ASCII text string Number of characters in module s text string ASCII text string IMPORTANT Modules
202. ion CST Information SINT WHO Information SINT N A N A Results 32 Points DINT N A 20 48 Modules All All All 1756 0A8D 1756 1756 OA8D 1756 1756 0A8D 1756 0B16D 1756 OA8E 0B16D 0B16D 1756 IA8D 1756 IB16D When you are using RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier some services require multiple parameters and tags in the Source and Destination fields An example is Pulse Test These services use copy instructions to move multiple tags to and from the message instruction source and destination tags The following table lists the copy instruction parameters needed for these services Table 58 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier Source Destination Tag in MSG Instruction Pulse Test ParametersSINT 10 Description Determines which point to perform the pulse test on Each bit corresponds to a point Only test one point at a time Source Enable 32 points DINT Destination Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from generic source destination buffers Length bytes Pulse Test Parameters 0 4 Determines maximum pulse width of the pulse test in milliseconds Pulse test inverts state of the output up to the maximum specified time Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 2 ms that is 20 Pulse Width INT Pulse Test Parameters 4 2 For AC modules only this s
203. ion on any point sets the bit for that point in the open wire word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 41456 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller Like input modules output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting However some output modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic output module Table 14 Fault Words on Diagnostic Output Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules Fuse Blown FuseBlown Indicates a blown fuse for a point on the module For more information see For more information see Electronic Fusing on page 53 No Load NoLoad Indicates a loss of a load from a point on the module For more information see No Load Detection on page 71 Output Verify OutputVerify Indicates when an output is not performing as commanded by the owner controller For more information see Field side Output Verification on page 72 All words are 32 bit alth
204. ion to work properly the 10 ms delay must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master controller Timestamp units are microseconds The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses The rungs perform these tasks e Rungs 0 and 1 detect the transition from Program to Run mode This is used to turn On nit which causes the program to initialize its tags s Rung2 only executes once and initializes the LastTimestamp LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed always on init 0 4 RRR always on 1 init ov Move Source Time at which Input Changed 0 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp 991817889 Ov Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 7 Dest LastTimestamp1 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C e Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for Change of State on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp Time at which Input Changed with the last timestamp LastTimestamp HO rA DU 3 Not Equal gt Ad F3 Source A Time at which Input Changed 0 Source A Time
205. ions following the Message instruction in the screen capture to make the module identification information more easily understood 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The user defined WHO data structure displays module identification information in an easily understood format For example the Controller Tags dialog box shows the module s major revision is 2 Controller Tags who controller Scone whetcerirolled x Show Show All sor raa hare z TagName Vase Force Mak Sue t sea sen AB 1756 DIC O ssl face AB 1755 DI mm 1 H WHO T T T E WHO vendor 16 0001 Hex INT WHO product_type 7 Desma INT WHO product code 2 Decma NT POHD ranr Tevet 2 Decma SINT EE WHO aire revision 5 Decima SINT HH WHU stalus ZU UUUU LL Binary INI MHD zera number 16 c000_Obaf He DINT FE WHO stiing lergih 32 Deca SINT WH aecii stiing ine 1 Hex SINT 32 Aw HO _Inlamation ancl 1 Hex SINT 40 who msg enc don MESSAGE bi montor rags emt 7 O ooo U You do not have to create the user defined data structure If you choose not to create this structure you can use the ASCII string and String length to retrieve and understand module identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software Rockwell Automatio
206. it has been configured In most cases you will use RSLogix 5000 software to complete the configuration The software uses default configurations such as RPI and filter times to get your I O module to communicate with its owner controller You can edit the default configuration as needed from the Module Properties dialog box Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 123 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configu ration Follow these steps to configure a ControlLogix digital I O module with Process Overview RSLogix 5000 software 1 Create anew module 2 Accept or customize the default configuration for the module 3 Edit the configuration as changes are needed Figure 19 Full Configuration Profile Diagram Click a tab to customize the configuration Tabs m New Module 1 Choosea module from the list 2 Choose a Major Revision Y Naming Screen Name Slot number Communication connection format Minor revision Keying choice Click OK to use the default configuration Series of Application Specific Screens 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Configuration Complete Edit Configuration 1 OK Button A series of tabs in RSLogix 5000 software enable you to change a modules configuration 41058 Confi
207. ith 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators with four terminals per input 1756 IM161 1492 IFM40DS240A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 240V AC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS240A 4 Fusible Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input gth 1756 IN16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 V16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015
208. k tag name in Create a New Tag Updated the use of the Browse button in the Communication Tab section Updated Number of Motor Starters to be Used table Change Added sections about using CIP Sync time Added the 1756 0B16IEF module to the list of modules with electronic fusing Added a chapter to describe features of the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 OB16IEF modules Added connection formats for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B16lEF modules Added leakage resistor sizing and supply voltage chart for the 1756 IB16D module Added wiring diagrams for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 OB16IEF modules Added status indicator information for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B16IEF modules Added new tags for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B16IEF modules Added a section about timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for fast 1 0 modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 247 AppendixH History of Changes 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 248 Change Added information for scheduling 1 0 modules on the ControlNet network and setting up 1 0 modules to trigger event based tasks Added features and module specific information for the 1756 IA32 module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 IG16 module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 0681 module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 0B16IS module Added features and module specifi
209. lLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Install the Module You can install or remove a ControlLogix I O module while chassis power is applied Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP provides the flexibility to maintain modules without having to stop production on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation remove or insert a module or an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature T ATTENTION Although the module is designed to support RIUP when you ATTENTION Prevent Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment gt e Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available Store the equipment in appr
210. lectronic fuse through RSLogix5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Diagnostics tab The fields on the Diagnostic tab vary depending on whether your module supports fusing on a per point basis or a per group basis Fusing on a per group basis lil Module Properties Local 4 1756 0B16E 3 1 aaa ire General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Reset Fuse for Points 0 7 Reset Fuse for Points 8 15 Status Running Reset Latched Diagnostics Electronic sac Burning 2 Click Reset for the output points for which to reset a fuse 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 55 Chapter 3 56 Common Module Features Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the 1756 OA8E module only When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you receive faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For information on these tags see Chapter A Follow these steps to enable or disabl
211. less of the module s density Fuse blown Only the bit affected is set to 1 Field power loss Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 61 Chapter3 Common Module Features The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Module fault Word All modules 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A fuse blown or field power loss condition sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 Fuse Blown Word mI Point Level Group Level 1756 0A8D 1756 0A16 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16E l A blown fuse for any point or group sets the bit for that point or group in the 1756 OB8EI 1756 0V16E fuse bl dandal h iate bits in the module fault word 1756 0B16D 1756 0V32E use blown word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word 1756 0B16lEF Group 1 Group 0 Field Power Loss Word 1 1756 0A8E only 41457 A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word 62 Rockwell Automation Publication
212. lication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 Not used OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Not Used Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 Group 0 Group 1 12 149 Chapter 8 ControlLogix Wiring Diagrams Simplified Schematic Diagnostic Control Block with Opto and Transformer Isolation 1756 0A8D L1 Backplane gt Interface TE iA GATE Li M H OUT L2 d Display Current 1A 500 mA 150 Loss of Field Power Surge Current Chart Surge 30 C 86 F 5A Surge 60 C 140 F 43 ms Time Continuous 30 C 86 F Continuous 60 C 140 F Group 0 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Group 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 ControlLogix AC 74 132V diagnostic output module 1756 0A8D ele l mom sebbe CA EB ED B c amp E IN s Oe D 12 0 OUT 1 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 12 1 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0A8E Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix AC 74 132V electronically fused output module
213. lication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 52 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout lIndicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Scheduled per 0 A valid time master has not timed out Point 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed or out The module is currently using its local clock Connection Listen Only Output Data None LateScheduleCount INT Late Schedule Count Increments each time a schedule is received late after its Connection Data scheduled time The counter rolls over every 65 535 late schedules Output Data Scheduled per If a late schedule is the most recent schedule for a point the output is still driven to new Point state Monitoring the late schedule count may be useful to determine whether network delays or connection losses are impacting schedules LostScheduleCount INT Lost Schedule Count lncrements each time the Schedule SequenceNumber output Connection Data tag skips a value A skipped sequence number may indicate a lost schedule The counter Output Data Scheduled per rolls over every 65 535 lost schedules Point LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Conn
214. llowing e Available configuration options e Type of data that is transferred between the module and its owner controller e Which tags are generated when the configuration is complete IMPORTANT Communication formats cannot be changed whether online or offline after a program is downloaded to the controller However connection formats can be changed when offline after a program is downloaded to the controller The communication or connection format also defines the connection between the controller writing the configuration and the module The number and type of choices varies depending on what module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis TIP When you choose a Listen only format only the General and Connection tabs appear when you view a module properties in RSLogix 5000 software Controllers that want to listen to a module but not own it use a Listen only format Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 127 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules The tables below describe the communication and connection formats available for input modules Table 26 Input Module Communication Formats Communication Format Input Data Data Return Module returns only general fault and input data CST Timestamped Input Data Module returns input data with the value ofthe system clock from its local chassis when the input data changes Rack Optimization The 1756 CN
215. lowing characteristics e Messages use unscheduled portions of system communication bandwidth e One service is performed per instruction e Performing module services does not impede module functionality such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 211 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Processing Real time Control Services sent through message instructions are not as time critical as the module and Module Services One Service Performed Per Instruction Create a New Tag 212 behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real time connection Therefore the module processes messaging services only after the needs of the I O connection have been met For example you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module but real time control of your process is still occurring by using the input value from that same channel Because the input value is critical to your application the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request This prioritization lets input channels be sampled at the same frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between sampling and producing the real time input data Message instructions only causes a module service to be performed once per execution For example if a message instruction sends a service to the module to unlatch the high
216. lt Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection Data communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs remain in Program Output Data Data mode See FaultMode FaultValue ProgMode and ProgValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails Pt x FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Data 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output continues PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag Pt x FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Data Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared 0 Off 1 0n Pt x FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Data 0 Output turns Off once the time in the FaultValueStateDurati
217. m and operate a ControlLogix system Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Product Certifications website http www ab com Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Available Features Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Topic Page Available Features 13 1 0 Modules in the ControlLogix System 14 Module Identification and Status Information 17 ControlLogix digital I O modules are input and output modules that provide On Off detection and actuation By using the producer consumer network model digital I O modules can produce information when needed while providing additional system functions The table lists several features available on ControlLogix digital I O modules Feature Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Description You can remove and insert modules and removable terminal blocks RTB while power is applied Producer consumer communication This communication method is an intelligent data exchange between mod
218. m mode Otherwise outputs remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if a communication failure occurs 1 Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs Table 41 Diagnostic Outp ut Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing see BlownFuse 8 bytes NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data DINT Output Echo Status Off On status for the output point echoed back from the output module This is used to verify 1 bit per point proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted Faulted 1 0 data for that point may be incorrect Check other 1 bit per point diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module are faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module No Load 1 bit per point also is detected 0 No fault
219. mation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 0A8 1756 0N8 ACOUTPUT S 01234567 1756 0B16D DCOUTPUT 5801234567 0 HT01234567 rH L ST 89 10 11 12 1314 15 FIT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 OB161EF N 4 DC OUTPUT Diagnostic SE Status e DIAG 01234567 0 H Indicator ST 891011 12 1314 15 K DIAG 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 PEER DEVICE 1756 OB8I 1756 0891 1756 0C8 1756 OH8I DC OUTPUT 101234567 x L 8 1756 0X8l RELAY OUTPUT 101234567 0 is 6 177 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Use RSLogix 5000 Software In addition to the status indicator display on the module RSLogix 5000 software for Troubleshootin g alerts you to fault conditions Fault conditions are reported in these ways e Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when the connection to the module is broken e Message in a screens status line e Notification in the Tag Editor General module faults are also reported in the Tag Editor Diagnostic faults are reported only in the Tag Editor e Status on the Module Info tab The following windows display fault notification in RSLogix 5000 software As shown in Figure 27 a warning icon dh appears in the I O Configuration tree when a communication fault occurs Figure
220. mation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 97 Chapter 5 98 Fast Module Features In this type of application the Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output configuration options provide these benefits s Minimum On Time and Extend Cycle Ensures that output devices that require a minimum time to turn On or that cannot react to a short pulse cycle can react with any given PWM On time calculation rather than not turning On To ensure the output device turns On when the calculated On time is less than the minimum On time you must enable the Extend Cycle option When Extend Cycle is enabled the cycle time is extended proportionately up to 10 times the calculated On time while taking into account the minimum On time EXAMPLE A solenoid requires at least 40 msto turn On During configuration you enable the output for PWM specify a minimum On time of 40 ms and enable the Extend Cyde option If the calculated On time in the PWMOnTime output tag drops below the 40 ms minimum On time the module automatically extends the On time to 40 ms and proportionally extends the cycle time in the PWMCycleTime output tag If the On time drops below 4 ms the output turns Off because the cycle cannot extend beyond 10 times the 40 ms On time If Extend Cycle is not enabled and the calculated On time is less than the minimum On time the output of the module does not energize Stagger Output Mitigates the power surge from outputs th
221. me masters generate a 64 bit coordinated system time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over the ControlNet network to establish a network update time NUT For more information about NUT refer to Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software on page 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference of when that input data changes state IMPORTANT Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when any input point changes state we recommend that you use timestamping on only one input point per module The following table describes how you can use CST timestamps Topic Description Timestamping for a The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module sequence of events point by timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must do the following Set the input modules communication format to CST Timestamped Input Data Enable COS for the input point where a sequence occurs and disable COS for all other points on the module TIP If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any ofthose input points change state as long as the c
222. me period that is 10x the duration of the filter time the input returns to the transitioned state for the duration of the filter time In this case the module sends timestamp data from the initial transition to the controller Inthe time period that is 10x the duration of the filter time the input never remains in the transitioned state for the duration of the filter time In this case the input is recognized but the module does not consider the original transition valid and drops the timestamp EXAMPLE A 1756 IB16IF module is configured for a 2 ms filter time for Off to On transitions In this example three possible scenarios can result after an input transitions from Off to On Scenario 1 The input turns On and remains On for the full 2 ms filter time The module considers the transition valid and sends the data recorded at the transition to the controller Figure 8 on page 87 Scenario 2 The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter time elapses The module continues to monitor the input for 10x the duration of the filter time Within that time period the input turns On again and remains On for at least 2 ms The module considers the transition valid and sends the data timestamped at the original transition to the controller Figure 9 on page 87 Scenario 3 The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter time elapses The module continues to monitor the input for 10x the duration of the filter time Wi
223. movable Terminal Block 119 Remove the Module from the Chassis 121 ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category Il applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an endosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that are present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see the following e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of p
224. munication mechanism from the controller to another module in the control system Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within a single ControlBus chassis An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules An electronic keying protection mode that requires no attributes of the physical module and the module configured in the software to match The process of transferring the contents ofa project on the workstation into the controller A feature where modules can be requested to perform an electronic check to make sure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured by the software An electronic keying protection mode that requires the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor catalog number major revision and minor revision Interface between user field wiring and I O module A ControlLogix process that lets you configure an I O module but prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the controller behaves as if the I O module does not exist at all A module that uses pre wired cable to connect wiring to an I O module An I O connection where another controller owns provides the configuration and data for the module A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional change to the module 249 Glossary minor revision multicast multiple owners network
225. must be in the Off state to trigger an event 1 The input must be in the On state to trigger an event Event x Disarm BOOL Disarm Event Prevents events from being triggered for a point via the pattern defined Connection Data with Event in the Event x Mask and Event x Value tags For more information see page 89 Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are triggered 1 Events are not triggered Event x NewEventAck BOOL Acknowledge New Event When set acknowledges a new event has occurred as Connection Data with Event 190 indicated by the Event x NewEvent event tag 0 A new event has not been acknowledged 1 Anew event has been acknowledged Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Input Data Timestamp Data Table 46 1756 IB16IF Module Event Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the input Connection Data with Event or Listen module is lost then all 32 bits are set For more information see page 103 Only with Event 0 No fault has occurred Input Data Timestamp Data 1 A fault has occurred Event x NewEvent BOOL New Event Indicates whether a new event has occurred This bit is cleared only when Connection Data with Event or Listen acknowledged by the Event x NewEventAck output tag or reset by the ResetEvents Only with Event output
226. n 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Software Configurable Filter Times On to Off and Off to On filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules IMPORTANT Input filters on the 1756 IB16IF module function differently than other digital 1 0 modules For information about input filters on the 1756 IB16IF module see page 86 Follow these steps to configure the input filter time 1 On the right side of the Configuration tab choose the input filter times from the Off gt On and On gt Off pull down menus lil Module Properties Local 1 1756 1A16 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Input Filter Time Points ot On on gt off 0 7 1 ms y 9ms v 5 1535 me i M iv M M M Li Iv LU m Li i iv m M i v Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Click OK Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation so if one point faults the others continue to op
227. n Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 227 Appendix C 228 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The illustration shows an example WHO ladder logic application The rungs perform these functions e Rung 0 constantly polls the module for WHO status To conserve bandwidth only poll for status when necessary e Rungl extracts the product type and catalog code e Rung2 extracts the module s major and minor revisions e Rung 3 extracts the module s status information s Rung 4 extracts the vendor ID and serial number who mai EN N Type LIP Generic h Message Corkel who mia HNO CERO COP COP 1 copy File c Cony File F 1 Scurce WHO Inteemaron z Source WHO hnlematien 4 Der WH prmdud Lre Dest WHO producl_code Lerighh 2 Lenglh 2 COP COP Copy File I CopyFile m e WHO lunra nl Source WHO Inlomalior 7 Des WHO major revieon Ded WHO minor revision Leigh Lenglh COP Copy File Source WHO lonar Dest WHO statue Length 2 M PB 1 Copy Fie cc Copy Fie Souce WHO IrfomaticnlO Sauce WHO tep Dest WHO vendo Dex WHO selial_nurber Length 2 Lergh rmi mi 5 Copy File Cop Fie c Scues WHO Inlormatior 15 Sowce WHO Jn omaten 14 Des WHO Sani ira Des WHO olnng_iergth Length g Lengh 1 tnl 1 7 MainRoutine 41 e Rung 3 extracts th
228. n your module has a unique tag that can be used in the controller program logic Follow these steps to access a module s tags 1 On the Controller Organizer expand the Controller folder right click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags f5 RSLogix 5000 Digital Test 1756 L74 20 1 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window H aa g a ox ex Offline f P RUN L par No Forces K Ok Energy Storage E 1 0 4 BJ Controller Organizer lt J Controller Digital Test Controller Tags Controller Fault 2 MewTag Ctri w Power Up Hand Tasks Monitor Tags Motion Groups Edit Tags X The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data JaziueDAo 4a 043u05 2 Expand the slot number of the module for which to view information See Appendix B for details on viewing and changing a module s configuration tags 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 8 Wiring Diagrams Cat No Page Cat No Page 1756 IA8D 135 1756 0A16l 153 1756 1A16 135 1756 0B8 154 1756 1A161 136 1756 OB8EI 155 1756 1432 137 1756 0B8l 156 1756 IB16 138 1756 0B16D 157 1756 IB16D 139 1756 0B16E 158 1756 1B161 140 1756 0B16l 161 1756 IB16lF 11 1756 OB16lEF 162 1756 1B32 142 1756 0B16lEFS 163 1756 1C16 143 1756 0B16IS 164 1756 1616 144 1756 0B32 165 1756 1H161 145 1756 0C8 166 1756 IM161 146 1756 0616 167 1756
229. nd left side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module 0 dom Top Guide S REN L SERE CEAN is EA pus LL L L Bottom Guide 20853 M 2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches snap into place Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module t 20854 M Remove the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis you must first remove the Terminal Block RTB from the module while the field side power is applied the module is electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is removed from the module The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before removing the module Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 119 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modul
230. nding tag can be examined in the event of a fault For more information about fault tags see Appendix B These modules use electronic fusing e 1756 OA8E e 1756 OBSEI e 1756 OA8D e 1756 OB16D e 1756 OB16E e 1756 OV16E e 1756 OV32E e 1756 OB16IEF e 1756 OBIGIEFS Refer to Table 3 to determine what fuse to use in your application If your module does not support fusing you can use a fused IFM to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Cat No Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier 1756 0A8 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SAN O Industry Corp 6 3A Medium lag SOC p n MT 4 6 3A 1756 0A8D2 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 OA8E 1756 0416 Yes Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littelfuse p n 3 15A Slo Blow H2153 15 1500A Interruption current 1756 0A161 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 0N8 6 3A Medium lag MT 4 6 3A Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 53 Chapter3 Common Module Features Table 3 Recommended Fuses continued Circuit Type Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier 1756 0889 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 08310 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 OB8EI2 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 17
231. nection Data with Event or Listen event occurs Data for bits 0 15 is shown as a bit mask where bit 0 is Pt 0 Data and bit Only with Event 15 is Pt 15 Data Input Data Timestamp Data 0 On a per bit basis indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt x Data input tag was Off when the event occurred 1 On a per bit basis indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt x Data input tag was On when the event occurred Event x Timestamp DINT Event Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp in CIP Sync format at the time an Connection Data with Event or Listen event occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 191 AppendixB Tag Definitions Fast Output Module Tags ControlLogix fast output modules have three types of tags s Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup s Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module e Output Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the I O module that can modify the module behavior IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding tag For more information about defining connection and input data types see Create a New Module on page 125 Topic Pa
232. nection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Output turns Off once the time in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and per Module module is still faulted or 1 Output turns On once the time in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and Connection Peer Ownership module is still faulted Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the Pt x ProgValue tag to determine the Connection Data state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x ProgValue tag default per Module 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the or output is currently On the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ProgValue BOOL Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the Connection Data corresponding bit for the Pt x ProgMode tag to be cleared Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 The output state is Off during Program mode per Module 1 The output state is On during Program mode or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMEnable BO
233. nfigurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital contact modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default Configurable states in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1 For details see the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN592 and the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module User Manual publication 1756 UM528 134 IMPORTANT Forthe latest 1 0 module specifications see the 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Technical Specifications publication 1756 TD002 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 1756 IA8D ControlLogix AC 79 132V diagnostic input module Not Used DaisyChainto Other RTBs L2 0 L2 0 Group 0 L2 0 L2 0 L2 1 L2 1 Group 1 L2 1 L2 1 L2 1 L2 L1 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module Simplified Schematic p 5V HS L R S TA K Input C 2 WV d er B m Ca r Display GND sy Contr
234. ng Wire Capacity Standard depth 336 mm 0 52 in 30484 M The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB but the capacity for Number of Wires 36 18 AWG wires 23 14 AWG wires IMPORTANT each remains the same regardless of RTB type Cat No RTB Type 1756 TBNH NEMA damp 1756 TBSH Spring clamp 20 position 1756 TBCH Cage damp 1756 TBS6H Spring damp 36 position 1756 TBE Any RTB that uses heavy gauge Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 wiring Extended depth 628 mm 0 97 in 40 14 AWG wires Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing When you use extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE the I O module depth is increased The diagram shows the difference in depth between an I O module using standard depth housing and one using extended depth housing Dimensions are in mm in lt 144 73 5 698 gt Oe 131 75 5 187 gt b 3 18 0 125 e uS Rear Surface of ControlLogix Chassis Standard depth Housing BAN Extended depth Housing J v sd EN 41682 IMPORTANT The depth from the front of the module to the back of the chassis is as follows Standard depth housing
235. ng option when selecting one IMPORTANT hanging Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to the device and any devices that are connected through the device Connections from other controllers can also be broken If an 1 0 connection to a device is interrupted the result can be a loss of data More Information For more detailed information on Electronic Keying see Electronic Keying in Logix5000 Control Systems Application Technique publication LOGIX ATO001 Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and a digital I O module without having to remove the module from the configuration This process lets you temporarily disable communication to a module such as to perform maintenance You can use module inhibiting in these ways e You write a configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and the configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 41 Chapter 3 42 Common Module Features e In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded the configuration to the module and is currently exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behave
236. nnection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OutputOverrideStatus BOOL Output Override Status Indicates whether local output data or logic point is set up to Connection Peer Ownership be overridden by the value in the Pt x OverrideOutputValue output tag Requires the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverrideOutputEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for the corresponding output is not enabled 1 The override feature for the corresponding output is enabled Pt x PeerInputOverrideStatus BOOL Peer Input Override Status Indicates whether peer input data mapped to the Connection Peer Ownership corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerInputValue output tag Requires the O Pt x OverridePeerlnputEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer inputs is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer inputs is enabled Pt x PeerWindows0OverrideStatus BOOL Peer Window 0 Override Status lIndicates whether peer window 0 data mappedto Connection Peer Ownership the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag Requires the O Pt x OverridePeerWindowOEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer window 0 is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer window 0 is enabled Ro
237. nput bc next time the input turns On the module records the transition as timestamp 21 6 once the input passes the filter time 0 1 2 3 4 17 18 1 20 21 2 Time in milliseconds Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 87 Chapter5 bast Module Features Follow these steps to configure input filter times 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab 2 In theInput Filter Time column enter Off to On and On to Off input filter times from 0 30 000 ps and click OK L Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16IF 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Input Fitter Time us iun 0 15 oz of C Latch Timestamps oppp0p0000000 0mr 000 ESTE ES EST ES ES EST EST ES ES STIS IS S S ESTE S EST ES ES EST EST ES EST ISTIS IS ST S S Status Offline 3 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description Configuration Tag Enable Filter To enable filtering for a point check the corresponding checkbox Pt x FilterEn To disable filtering for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Input Filter Time Enter an Off to On input filter time from 0 30 000 us FilterOffOn Off On Input Filter Time Enter an On to Off input filter time from 0 30 000 us FilterOnOff On Off 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fa
238. nput filter times 86 modules with RSLogix 5000 software 40 peer ownership 80 per point timestamping 83 point level output states 51 pulse width modulation 100 connection direct 23 format 127 rack optimized 23 24 connection format about 127 Data 128 129 Data with Event 90 103 128 Listen Only 128 129 Listen Only with Event 128 Peer Input with Data 129 ControlNet network input modules in remote chassis 28 output modules in remote chassis 32 rack connection 24 tip on conserving bandwidth 28 coordinated system time CST 42 220 create event tags for fast module 90 new module 125 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Index CST Timestamped Data communication format 128 CST Timestamped Fuse Data communication format 129 D data exchange peer ownership 80 producer consumer model 13 31 data structure array 209 flat 209 Data with Event connection format 90 103 diagnostic features 63 78 latching 57 64 direct connection 24 disable change of state 48 85 diagnostic latching 57 diagnostics for field power loss 56 filtering 88 module communication 41 timestamp latching 85 timestamps 85 dynamic reconfiguration 130 edit configuration 130 electonic fusing 53 electrostatic discharge 107 enable change of state 48 85 diagnostic latching 57 diagnostics for field power loss 56 filtering 88 timestamp latching 85 timestamps 85 event task trigger 28 89 90 extended dep
239. nt sets the bit for that point in the fuse blown word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 1 Field power Loss Word 1756 0A8D only A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word No Load Word Ano load condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the no load word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Output Verify Word An output verify condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the output verify word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 41457 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Chapter 5 Fast Module Features Tanke Page Fast Input Module Compatibility 79 Fast Output Module Compatibility 80 Fast Features 80 Features Specific to Fast Input Modules 81 Features Specific to Fast Output Modules 91 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 103 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 104 Fast digital I O
240. o general faults and data each connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 23 Chapter 2 24 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Direct Connections A direct connection is a real time data transfer link between the controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller the controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each ofthe modules referenced by the data If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there When a device s presence is detected there the controller automatically sends the configuration data If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot a connection is made and operation begins If the configuration data is not appropriate the data is rejected and an error message appears in the software In this case the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons For example a module configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module Any break in the connection causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module Breaks in the connection can be caused by a modul
241. o ooo ooo Datais sent from the oowd L owner controller gt Output data is sent at least as often as RPI ooo Ss oon c S e 9 ControlNet Network 42675 The reserved spot on the network and the output data sent by the controller are asynchronous to each other This means there are best and worst case scenarios as to when the owner controller receives updated data from the module in a remote chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remote output module receives the data almost immediately 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the output module does not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT These best and worst case scenarios indicate the time required for output data to transfer from the owner controller to the module once the owner
242. odules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix diagnostic 1 0 modules provide nonisolated field side wiring options each 1 0 module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side No Load Detection For each output point no load detection senses the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the Off state only The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a current sensing optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor Current flows through this sensing circuit only when the output is Off as shown in the simplified diagram V Current Sense Current Flow with Output Current Flow with Output On Transistor Output Off Y 41681 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 71 Chapter 4 Diagnostic Module Features 72 Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification 1756 OA8D 10 mA amp 1756 OBI6D 3 mA In the On state the module must be connected to a load that draws a minimum current equal to these values If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current specification diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is
243. odules use all 64 bits of the timestamp to schedule so there are no limits on schedule ranges Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Mixing CST and CIP Sync Modules in a ControlLogix System CST is automatically enabled for each chassis that has been configured to use CIP Sync Therefore it is possible to include modules that use CST for their time base into systems that have been configured to use CIP Sync Also there is a direct correlation between CIP Sync system time and the local chassis CST time The CIP Sync system time and local chassis CST time are related by this equation CIP Sync system time CST time offset The offset in the above equation is a value unique to each chassis and can be obtained by using one of these methods e CSTOffset from the Wall Clock Time WCT object of a controller in the chassis e SystemOffset from the Time Synchronize object of a controller in the chassis e LocalClockOffset returned in an I O connection from a CIP Sync capable module in the chassis The relationship described above enables CST and CIP Sync based I O to interoperate as longas the offset in the chassis containing the CST based module is accessible Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 45 Chapter3 Common Module Features Common Features Specific to Input Modules 46 Producer Consumer Communication By using Producer Consumer communica
244. og number of your 1 0 module New Module Type 1756 IB16D 16 Point 10 30 DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Description Comm Format Full Diagnostics Input Data Revision 3 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Keying 7 Open Module Properties R New Module General Connection Module Info Configuration Type 1756 IB16IF 16 Point 24V High Speed DC Isolated Input Sink Source Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Slot 2 v Description Module Definition Revision m Electronic Keying Compatible Module Module Definition Data Timestamp Data Connection Input Data Series Revision Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Input Data Timestamp Data Status Creating Click Change to open the Module Definition dialog box c Cancel and choose additional properties such as an electronic keying method and connection format Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Communication or Connection Formats The initial configuration ofa module requires you to choose a communication or connection format The term used depends on the AOP for your module Earlier AOPs use communication formats and later AOPs use connection formats A communication or connection format determines the fo
245. ogram to Run mode It initializes LastInputTimestamp which is used to detect a change of state on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed This rung also clears the output modules TimestampOffset bit to disable its Time Step Compensation algorithm Local 2 I Pt 0 Data OP 0 Copy File Source Local 2 I Pt 0 Timestamp OffOn 0 Dest InputTimestamp Length 1 Local 2 1 Pt 0 Data OP 1 Copy File Source Local 2 I Pt 0 Timestamp OnOff 0 Dest InputTimestamp Lenath 1 OP 2 Copy File Source InputTimestamp Dest LastlnputTimestamp Lenath 1 LR Clear Dest Local 4 O TimestampOffset 0 0 LR Clear Dest Local 4 O TimestampOffset 1 s Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for a change of state on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp with the last timestamp LastInputTimestamp Not Equal 64 bit Add 64 bit _NEQ ADD 3 Not Equal 64 bit Add B4 bit L NEG InputChange L ADD AddDelay Inp amp InputTimestamp Inp amp InputTimestamp Inp B LastinputTimestamp Inp B Delay Out OutputTimestamp Copy File Source OutputTimestamp Dest Local 4 0 Timestamp 0 Length Copy File Source InputTimestamp Dest LastinputTimestamp Length 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 223 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The input po
246. olLogix Backplane l Interface ms Y Ax Open Wire Tet H 4 Display t o GN ControlLogix Backplane Interface 1756 1A16 Simplified Schematic IN 0 5V E rt L2 0 mos E ns TK k La WD Controllogix Display Backplane Interface IN 1 Group 0 Daisy IN 3 Chain to Other IN 5 RTBs IN 7 L2 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 L1 0 Loss of Field Power 0 1 2 Rs 47 kQ 1 2W 5 Resistor 3 4 5 47 KQ 1 2 W 5 Resistor 6 7 L1 1 Loss of Field Pow ED ID KD Be ie ene DEO DIP D KO KD DE CN 1756 1 A16 d vi c E ED ED ED ED PSs CE EDI E Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 N 2 N 4 Group 0 N 6 L2 0 N 8 gt I 135 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1A161 ControlLogix AC 79 132V isolated input module Simplified Schematic Isolated Gaia Wiring d U 0o0 12 0 92 18 N 0 o 11 0 IN 0 FaN 2 1 Hae spp iN E C 2 E t d 22 o L2 2
247. on 69 word diagnostic input modules 76 output data echo 31 52 field side verification 72 verify word 78 Output Data communication format 129 ownership 20 controller I 0 module relationship 20 direct connection 24 input remote connections 28 Listen only 24 34 multiple owners of input modules 34 output remote connections 32 rack connection 24 optimization 24 26 P peer ownership 80 point level fault reporting 66 prevent electrostatic discharge 107 producer consumer model 13 31 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Index pulse capture 82 latch 82 test 74 pulse width modulation configure 100 cycle limit 95 cycle time 93 execute all cycles 95 extend cycle 96 minimum On time 96 On time 93 stagger output 96 Rack Optimization communication format 128 129 rack optimized connection 23 24 26 remote chassis input modules 28 output modules 32 removable terminal block 14 assemble 115 install 118 key 109 parts illustration 16 remove 119 types 112 wire 110 Removal and Insertion Under Power 13 39 107 118 119 remove 1 0 module 121 removable terminal block 119 requested packet interval 27 75 RIUP See Removal and Insertion Under Power RPI See requested packet interval RSLogix 5000 software configure 1 0 modules 20 40 use with RSNetWorx software 20 RSNetWorx software transfer configuration data 20 use with RSLogix 5000 software 20 RTB See removable terminal block
248. on tag elapses and module is still faulted 1 Output turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and module is still faulted Pt x ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when the controller is in Program mode Output Data Data 0 Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag default 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Data Output continued Name Pt x ProgValue Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared 0 The output state is Off during Program mode 1 The output state is On during Program mode Tag Definitions Appendix B Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMEnable BOOL Enable PUM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current PWM configuration 0 PWM is disabled default 1 PWM is enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output beha
249. onductors on any single terminal Use only the same size ATTENTION When using the 1756 TBCH do not wire more than two 0 33 1 3 wires with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types When using the 1756 TBS6H do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal When using the 1756 TBNH do not wire more than two 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG conductors on any single terminal Use only the same size wires with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types When using the 1756 TBSH do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal To see a listing of the IFMs available for use with the ControlLogix analog I O modules see Appendix G This chapter explains the general guidelines for wiring your digital I O modules including grounding the cable and connecting the wires to each RTB type The following table shows each module catalog number and the corresponding page with the wiring diagram Cat No Page Cat No Page 1756 IA8D 135 1756 0A16l 153 1756 1A16 135 1756 0B8 154 1756 IA161 136 1756 0B8El 155 1756 1432 137 1756 0B8l 156 1756 IB16 138 1756 0B16D 157 1756 IB16D 139 1756 0B16E 158 1756 1B161 140 1756 0B16l 161 1756 IB16IF 141 1756 0B16IEF 162 1756 1B32 142 1756 163 1756 1C16 143 1756 0B16IS 164 1756 1616 144 1756 0B32 165 1756 1H161 145 1756 0C8 166 1756 IM16l 146 1756 0616 167 1756 IN16 146 1756 0H81 168 1756 1V16 147
250. ons to the same chassis one for each format and the same data travels across the ControlNet network If you use rack optimization for both modules you preserve bandwidth and configure your system to operate more efficiently The input or data echo information is limited to general faults and data No additional status such as diagnostic information is available IMPORTANT Each controller can establish connections in any combination of direct or rack optimized In other words you can use a rack optimized connection between an owner controller and multiple remote 1 0 modules while simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and any other 1 0 modules in the same remote chassis The illustration below shows how a rack optimized connection eliminates the need for three separate connections The owner controller in the local chassis communicates with all the I O modules in the remote chassis but uses only one connection The ControlNet communication module sends data from the modules simultaneously at the RPI Figure 2 Rack optimized Connection B oos R ood U 2000 er 0 Remote Chassis C 8 8 ooo ne Connection for All Remote 1 0
251. opriate static safe packaging when not in use Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 107 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Follow these steps to insert the module into the chassis 1 Align the circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides Printed Circuit Board 20861 M 20862 M Installation of the module is now complete 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Key the Removable Terminal Block Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Key the removable terminal block RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the wrong wiring in the RTB to your module Wedge and U shaped bands are manually inserted into the RTB and module This process hinders a wired RTB from being accidentally inserted into a module that does not match the positioning of the respective tabs Key positions on the module that correspond to unkeyed positions on the RTB For example if you place a U shaped keying band in slot 4 on the module do not insert a wedge shaped tab in slot 4 on the RTB or your RTB does not mount on the module We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in the chassis Follow these steps to key the RTB 1 To key the module insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals 2 Push the band onto the module until it snaps into place 20850 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 109 Chapt
252. ough only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits 0 7 are used in the module fault word Fault bits in the fuse blown word field power loss word no load word and output verify word are logically entered into the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 15 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Field power loss Only the bit affected is set to 1 No load Output verify Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 77 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Module fault Word 1 1 1 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A fuse blown A field power loss no load or output verify condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Fuse Blown Word 1 A blown fuse for any poi
253. ount of time in the Delay tag The advantage of using CIP Sync over timers is that the synchronization is performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the value in the Delay tag must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays In this example the controller input and output modules all reside in the same chassis but they can reside in separate chassis as long as they are all part of the same synchronized CIP Sync system Timestamp units are microseconds IMPORTANT Unlike standard and diagnostic 1 0 modules that use CST for timestamps fast 1 0 modules use CIP Sync timestamps which are a full 64 bits in width Manipulation of CIP Sync time values requires the use of 64 bit math The following example uses 64 bit Add on Instructions contained in the LINT 64 bit signed 2 s complement integer Math Library at http samplecode rockwellautomation com Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses The rungs perform these tasks e Rungs 0 and 1 capture the rising or falling timestamps for input 0 of a 1756 IB16IF module e Rung 2 executes only once at the transition from Pr
254. output turning Off See Figure 15 on page 96 If the output logic transitions multiple times before the cycle limit is reached all subsequent transitions are ignored until the cycle limit is reached Once the cycle limit is reached a new cycle sequence begins This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked By default the Execute All Cycles checkbox is cleared CPt x PWMExecuteAllCycles CPWM ExecuteAllCycles 5 To copy the current configuration to one or more of the remaining output points so that multiple outputs share the same PWM behavior do the following a Click Copy PWM Configuration b On the Copy PWM Configuration dialog box check the points to which to apply the current configuration and click OK By default all points are checked Copy PWM Configuration Uncheck All Points Copy Point 0 PWM Configuration to selected points Point 1 v Point 9 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 s S S S s S S Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Cancel 6 Onthe PWM Configuration tab click OK to save the configuration for each output point you specified Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers Module Fault
255. pagation on an I O module Description Hardware How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed ASIC ASIC scan 200 ps EXAMPLE A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that can contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 0B16E module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by these factors e Hardware delay to energize the input typically 70 us on the 1756 0B16E module e ASIC scan of 200 ps In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms the 1756 0B16E module has a 270 ys signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed See Chapter 8 for nominal and maximum delay times for each module Connections With ControlLogix I O modules a connection is the data transfer link between a controller and an I O module A connection can be one of these types e Direct e Rack optimized The table lists the advantages and disadvantages of each connection type Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages Direct All input and data echo information is With more data transferring over the transferred including diagnostic network your system does not operate as information and fusing data efficiently as with rack connections Rack optimized Connection usage is economized The Input and data echo information is limited owner controller has a single RPI value for t
256. pecifies how long to delay after the zero cross before performing the pulse test Optimum time to perform pulse test is at its peak AC voltage Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 4 ms that is 40 Zero Cross Delay INT Pulse Test Parameters 6 2 Specifies how long to wait after the pulse is completed before declaring a fault Output verify delay parameter is needed to account for the hardware propagation delay Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 2 ms that is 20 Output Verify Delay INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Pulse Test Parameters 8 2 217 Appendix C Table 58 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier continued Source Destination Tag Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from in MSG Instruction generic source destination buffers Source Destination Length bytes CST Information SINT 20 Current CST Time from Module CST Information 0 Current Time DINT 2 8 Status of CST in Module CST Information 8 CST Status INT 2 Bit0 0 timer OK 1 timer fault Bit1 0 no ramping 1 ramping ramping indicates that once time is synchronized it corrects errors by slowly ramping to the master s time Bit2 0 not time mas
257. ppendix B Tag Definitions Table 43 1756 IB16IF Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition LatchTimestamps BOOL Latch Timestamps Latches a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS transition Connection Data When an initial timestamp is latched timestamps for subsequent COS transitions are Input Data Data or Timestamp Data dropped or e Once a latched timestamp is acknowledged via the corresponding bit in the TD Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck tag the timestamp is overridden SHOES eae with Event upon the next COS transition Input Data Timestamp Data Requires COS to be enabled via the Pt x COSOffOnEn or Pt x COSOnOff tags For more information see page 83 0 Timestamps are overridden with each successive COS transition 1 Timestamps are latched until acknowledged FilterOffOn INT Filter Time Off to On Defines how long an Off to On input transition must remain inthe Connection Data On state before the module considers the transition valid For more information see page 86 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Valid filter time 0 30 000 ps or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data FilterOnOff INT Filter Time On to Off Defines how long an On to Off input transition must remain inthe Connection Data Off state before the module considers the transition valid For more information see page 86 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Valid filter time
258. r field power loss 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OABE 3 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane Point Output State During Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Latching n ott vlot Off ott Off lott Off lott Off v ott Off v ott Off lott Off EIS M M Iv Iv v M p M r M S M Li M Li M Lele hes Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Doone of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss column s To enable field power loss detection for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable field loss detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Topic Page Field Wiring Options 7 No Load Detection 71 Field side Output Verification 72 Pulse Test 74 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 75 Field Wiring Options As with diagnostic input modules ControlLogix diagnostic output modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options I O m
259. r more information see Programmable Fault State Delays on page 91 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 39 Chapter 3 40 Common Module Features Software Configurable RSLogix 5000 software provides an interface to configure each module All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration within the software You can also use the software to retrieve the following information from any module in the system e Serial number e Firmware revision information e Product code e Vendor e Error and fault information e Diagnostic counters By eliminating tasks such as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a control system It compares the device defined in your project to the installed device If keying fails a fault occurs These attributes are compared Atrribute Description Vendor The device manufacturer Device Type The general type of the product for example digital 1 0 module Product Code The specific type of the product The Product Code maps to a catalog number Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device Minor Revision Anumber that represents behavior changes in the device Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Common Module Features Ch
260. r sends the module only output data 1756 OB16lEF 1756 0B16IEFS Scheduled Per Module The owner controller sends the module output data and a CIP Sync 1756 OB16IEF timestamp value Scheduled Per Point The owner controller sends output data and a CIP Sync timestamp 1756 OB16IEFS value to points configured for scheduling Listen Only None Establishes a Listen only connection with no data 1756 0B16IEF 1756 OB161EFS Peer Input with Data Data with Peer Establishes a Listen only connection to input peer modules 1756 0B16IEF See the Peer Ownership Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 129 Chapter 7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Edit the Configuration 130 After you add a module to the I O configuration in RSLogix 5000 software you can review and edit the configuration You can also download the data to the controller while online This is called dynamic reconfiguration Follow these steps to edit a module s configuration 1 On the Controller Organizer right click an I O module and choose Properties i RSLogix 5000 Digital Test 1756 L74 20 1 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help Boll 5 B oco Offline D ERUN No Forces y F OK a T Energy Storage My m vo r Organizer LO Controller Digital Test G Tasks m Motion Groups Add On Instructions L Data Types Trends lt
261. rature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output channels that are affected by this phenomena continues to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels must be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until that point is reset When the pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display During normal operating conditions hardware damage is not possible An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to GND as a possible cause Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Topic Page Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 67 Open Wire Detection 69 Field Power Loss Detection 70 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules
262. re enabled for COS and timestamping 5 Ifyou checked the Latch Timestamps checkbox use program logic or the RSLogix 5000 tag editor to acknowledge transitions and clear latched timestamps via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck and Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tags For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 85 Chapter5 bast Module Features Software Configurable Filter Times To account for hard contact bounce you can configure Off to On and On to Off input filter times of 0 30 000 us in RSLogix 5000 software These filters define how long an input transition must remain in the new state before the module considers the transition valid When an input transition occurs the module timestamps the transition on the edge of the transition and stores timestamp data for the transition The module then monitors the input for the duration of the filter time to verify that the input remains in the new state e Ifthe input remains in the new state for a time period equal to the filter time the input is recognized and recorded The module sends timestamp data for the transition and the input s On Off state to the controller e Ifthe input changes state again before the duration of the filter time has elapsed the module continues to scan that input for up to 10x the filter time During this continued scan period one of the following events occurs In the ti
263. re 12 PWM Application without PWM Application with PWM Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 5 seconds Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 5 seconds Output State Output is active for 4 5 seconds Output State Each pulse is active for 0 5 seconds On time AK 1Second Cycle Time By default PWM is configured to continue the output pulse train until che output logic turns Off When the output logic turns Off the output pulse train immediately stops EXAMPLE In Figure 13 the output logic is On for 4 25 seconds and then turns Off in the middle of the last pulse Even though the PWM On time is configured for 0 5 seconds the last pulse is only active for 0 25 seconds because it is truncated when the output logic turns Off Figure 13 PWM with Truncated Pulse Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 25 seconds Output State The last pulse is truncated when the output logic turns Off 94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 IMPORTANT _ The Program and Fault mode states configured for the module override the PWM output state unless the point is configured to hold the last state while in Program or Fault mode If a point is configured to hold the last state and the output is currently On the output continues to use PWM until the PWM cycle limit is reached the module transitions out of Program or Fault mode or a final fault state goes into effect For more inform
264. re are best and worst case scenarios as to when the owner controller receives updated data from the module in a remote chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast with updated channel data just before the reserved network spot is made available In this case the remotely located owner receives the data almost immediately Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 29 Chapter 2 30 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the owner controller does not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote chassis lets the module multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input changes state This helps to reduce the worst case time When selecting values for the remote modules RPI system throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a power of two times the current NUT running on the ControlNet network For example the following table shows recommended RPI values for a system by using a NUT of 5 ms Table 2 Recommended RPI Values for System by Using NUT of 5 ms NUT 5 ms x20 x2 x2 x23 x24 x25 x26 x27 Optimal RPI 5 ms 10 ms 20ms 40 ms 80 ms 160 ms 320ms 640 ms Values ms
265. ridden by the Connection Data Data with Event value in the Pt x DataOverrideValue output tag because the corresponding bit in the Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Pt x DataOverrideEn output tag is set Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Inputs are not being overridden 1 Inputs are being overridden Pt x Timestamp OffOn DINT Off to On Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp for the input point s last transition Connection Data Data with Event to On The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x Timestamp OnOff DINT On to Off Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp for the input point s last transition Connection Data Data with Event to Off The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 189 Appendix B Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 45 1756 IB16IF Module Output Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ResetTimestamps BOOL Reset Timestamp When set clears all timestamps when a rising edge occurs Connection Data or Data with Event 0 Timestamps are not reset Input Data Timestamp Data 1 Timestamps are reset when a rising edge occurs ResetEvents BOOL Reset Event When set clears all events in the Event x NewEvent and Connection Data with Event Event x Timestamp
266. ring normal operation when a controller sends out an output command to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command returns the commanded state of the output to the system This process verifies that the module has received the command and tried to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal through a Listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller Monitor Fault Bits The output data echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is an anomaly with the module the commanded state and the output data echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the output data echo check your output module for the following conditions Communication fault e Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse The module does not turn on an output if an overload or short circuit is detected e 1756 OA8D and 1756 OASE only Loss of field power The module does not turn on an output unless AC power is detected Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules As with input modules ControlLo
267. rolLogix digital input modules can trigger an event task The event task lets you execute a section of logic immediately when an event or receipt of new data occurs Your ControlLogix digital I O module can trigger event tasks whenever module input data changes state Refer to these considerations when using a digital input module to trigger an event task e Only one input module can trigger a specific event task e Input modules trigger the event task based on the modules COS configuration The COS configuration defines which points prompt the module to produce data if they turn On or Off This production of data triggers the event task e Typically enable COS for only one point on the module If you enable COS for multiple points a task overlap of the event task may occur For more information on event tasks refer to the Logix5000 Controllers Tasks Programs and Routines Programming Manual publication 1756 PM005 If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the owner controller resides the role of the RPI and the module s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module multicasts data within its own chassis as described in the previous section But only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller receives it over the network Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 9 8 RA 4 Loc
268. rotection provided by enclosures Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 105 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations Products marked CL 1 DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the System Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation Informations sur l utilisation de cet quipement en environnements dangereux Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en environnements de Classe Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature
269. s as if the connection to the module does not exist IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs transition to zero during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited outputs transition to zero You may need to use module inhibiting in these instances e Multiple controllers own the same digital input module A change is required in the module s configuration However the change must be made to the program in all controllers In this case you follow these steps a Inhibit the module b Change configuration in all controllers c Uninhibit the module e You want to upgrade a digital I O module We recommend you use this procedure a Inhibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module e You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet and you do not want the controller to continually look for a module that does not yet exist In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs This section describes how to use CST timestamps in standard and diagnostic I O modules and the CIP Sync timestamps in fast I O modules Use Coordinated System Time with Standard and Diagnostic 1 0 Modules Ti
270. s i chadeiecsh OPE E a e 225 Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification ANG Status exscr e nx d iei Pc n RUN 226 Review ot Tags in Ladder Logic ui sse 229 Appendix D Appendix E Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters 234 Appendix F If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying I O Configuration 236 If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 4 236 Appendix G Cable Overview 0 0 ccc cece cece eect I Ie 237 Appendix H 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 cece ee eeees 247 1756 UMO058F EN P April 2012 rn ceteri 247 1756 UMO058E EN P Aug st 20 T0 vee acta dati dest etd wet 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 9 Table of Contents Glossary Index 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Studio 5000 Environment Preface This manual describes how to install configure and troubleshoot your ControlLogix digital I O modules There is also a complete listing of digital input and output modules including specifications and wiring diagrams You must be able to program and operate a ControlLogix controller to efficiently use your digital I O module The Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment combines engineering and design elements into a common environment The first element is the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application The Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and w
271. s in a remote chassis ControlLogix feature that lets a user install or remove a module or RTB while power is applied Field wiring connector for I O modules The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of I O data In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is executing s Inputs are actively producing data e Outputs are actively controlled A system feature that is performed on user demand such as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset Backplane side of the interface to the I O module A named area of the controllers memory where data is stored A ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a relative time reference of when that change occurred Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 A agency certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM CE 64 array data structure 209 assemble RTB 115 C cage clamp RTB 112 Change of State COS data transmissions 27 diagnostic change of state 68 modules 68 75 CIP Sync time 44 45 200 207 222 Class Division 2 certification 64 communication format 127 producer consumer model 31 communication format about 127 CST Timestamped Fuse Data 129 CST Timestamped Input Data 128 Full Diagnostic Input Data 128 Full Diagnostics 129 Input Data 128 Listen Only 128 129 Output Data 129 Rack Optimization 128 129 Scheduled Output Data 129 usage tip 127 configure fault state delay 92 input filter time 49 i
272. s use CIP Sync for both timestamps and scheduling CIP Sync is a CIP implementation of the IEEE 1588 PTP Precision Time Protocol CIP Sync provides accurate real time Real World Time or Universal Coordinated Time UTC synchronization of controllers and devices connected over CIP networks This technology supports highly distributed applications that require timestamping sequence of events recording distributed motion control and increased control coordination The 1756 IBIGIF 1756 OBIGIEF and 1756 OB16IEFS modules are CIP Sync slave only devices There must be another module on the network that functions as a master clock For more information on how to use CIP Sync technology see the Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication A AT003 Fast I O modules can be used to capture timestamps and schedule outputs like CST based modules while providing the following advantages e Fast I O modules have much higher precision than CST based modules e Inputs are timestamped by point so multiple inputs can be configured for COS without losing timestamp data e CIP Sync is system wide so timestamp and schedule values are consistent across all modules in the system For instance using 1756 IB16IF input timestamps to schedule outputs on a 1756 OBI6IEF module means the controller input module and output module are not restricted to the same chassis as is the case with CST based I O e Output m
273. se 82 timestamps 85 Listen Only communication format 34 128 129 local chassis input modules 27 output modules 31 locking tab 16 loss of field power 52 M major revision 124 mechanical fusing 53 keying 16 minor revision 124 module 1756 1A16 135 1756 1A161 136 1756 1432 137 1756 IA8D 135 1756 1B16 138 1756 IB16D 139 1756 1B16l 140 1756 IB16IF 141 1756 1B32 142 1756 116 143 1756 1616 144 1756 1H161 145 1756 IM161 146 1756 IN16 146 1756 IV16 147 1756 1 32 148 1756 0416 152 1756 0161 153 1756 048 149 1756 0A8D 150 1756 0A8E 151 1756 0B16D 157 1756 0B16E 158 1756 0B161 161 1756 0B16lEF 162 1756 0B16lEFS 163 1756 0B16lS 164 1756 0B32 165 1756 0B8 154 1756 OB8EI 155 1756 0B8l 156 1756 0C8 166 1756 0616 167 1756 0H8l 168 1756 0N8 169 1756 0V16E 170 1756 0V32E 171 1756 0W16l 172 1756 OX8I 173 module compatibility diagnostic input modules 63 output modules 64 fast input modules 79 output modules 80 standard input modules 37 output modules 38 module fault word diagnostic input modules 76 output modules 78 104 standard output modules 62 module identification information 17 ASCII text string 17 major revision 17 minor revision 17 product code 17 product type 17 retrieving 40 serial number 17 status 17 vendor ID 17 module status 17 multiple owner controllers 34 NEMA clamp RTB 113 no load detection diagnostic output modules 71 word diagnostic output modules 78 0 open wire detecti
274. sed in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1bit per point See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue DINT Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1 bit per point See FaultMode 0 Off 1 0n FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable NoLoadEn DINT No Load Enables No Load diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable OutputVerifyEn DINT Output Verify Enables Output Verify diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 185 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 40 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags continued Name Data Type Definition ProgMode DINT Program Mode Used in conjnunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in 1 bit per point Program mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue DINT Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgMode 0 0ff 1 0n ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure 1 byte per module occurs in Progra
275. sing edge 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering turn On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became energized simultaneously Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse cycles occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off default 1 Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag to occur Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default 1 The PWM CycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of output logic For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Connection Data Output Data Data 203 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Da
276. st Module Features Chapter 5 Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks The 1756 IB16IF input module can initiate an event task over a dedicated second connection in response to four user defined input patterns You can define these patterns in real time during a control process by using these output tags e Event x Mask Defines which input points trigger the event task e Event x Value Defines whether the masked input points must be in the On or Off state before the event task is triggered Each pattern can use any of the module 16 input points as shown in the examples below In example pattern 1 the input module triggers the event task when input points 0 7 are in the On state Table 18 Example Pattern 1 Output Tag Bit Position Event x Mask Event x Value In example pattern 2 the input module triggers the event task when input points 0 7 are in the Off state Table 19 Example Pattern 2 Output Tag Bit Position 15 Event x Mask Event x Value 0 0 O O JO O 0 O x x x x x fx Ix x In example pattern 3 the input module triggers the event task when input points 4 6 8 and 10 are in the On state Table 20 Example Pattern 3 Bit Position Output Tag Event x Mask Event x Value Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 89 Chapter 5 90 Fast Module Features In example pattern 4 the input module triggers the ev
277. stamp Data Pt x TimestampDropped BOOL Dropped Timestamp lIndicates whether a timestamp was lost as a result of one of the Connection Data Data with Event following Listen Only or Listen Only with Event The corresponding bit was set in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag so a new Input Data Timestamp Data timestamp was not recorded because the previous timestamp was latched The corresponding bit in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag was not set but a timestamp was replaced by a new timestamp because the previous timestamp was not acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tags 0 A timestamp was not dropped 1 A timestamp was dropped Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tIndicates whether CIP Sync is available on the backplane Connection Data Data with Event 0 CIP Sync is not available Listen Only or Listen Only with Event 1 CIP Sync is available Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data Data with Event out Listen Only or Listen Only with Event 0 A time master is either not detected on the backplane or is valid See Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x CIPSyncValid 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed out Pt x InputOverrideStatus BOOL Input Override Status Indicates whether local inputs are being over
278. system time and the modules Connection Data local time The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Output Data Scheduled per This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffset in Module the controller s TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the module Timestamp DINT Timestamp CIP Sync time at which to apply scheduled output data Connection Data 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Scheduled per Module The tag names and data structures for the 1756 OBIGIEFS module vary based on the module definition s For Scheduled Per Point output the module uses a flat data structure See Table 50 Table 52 and Table 54 e For Data output or Listen Only connections the module uses an array data structure See Table 51 Table 53 and Table 55 For more information about array data structures see Array Data Structures on page 209 Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output Name DataType Tag Definition Module Definition ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection Data communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs remain in Program Output Data Scheduled per mode See FaultMode FaultValue ProgMode and ProgValue Point 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails
279. t Data Data with Peer InputPartnerSlot SINT Peer Partner Slot ldentifies the slot number of the local chassis where the peer input Connection Peer Ownership module resides Output Data Data with Peer Valid values e 0 16 e 1 No input module has been identified as a peer InputPartnerlD SINT Peer Partner ID Identifies the peer input module that controls outputs on the Connection Peer Ownership 1756 OB16IEF module The type of module determines the connection type of format of Output Data Data with Peer input data Valid values 0 None default 1 1756 IBT6IF 2 1756 LSC8XIB8I Pt x FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the Pt x FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default per Module 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the or came iy the utpl conss PHM une cerca T Cn eat state PIE ia the Pt x FaultFinalState tat SUE ala T Peer Pt x FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared per Module 0 0ff or 1 0n Con
280. t Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the input Connection Data or Listen Only module is lost then all 32 bits are set For more information see page 103 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Offset lIndicates the offset in microseconds between the current CST and Connection Data Data with Event the CIP Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync time was last updated The timestamp Connection Data Data with Event is in CIP Sync time Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data Data with Event module is synced Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table 44 1756 IB16IF Module Input Tags continued Tag Definitions Name DataType TagDefinition Module Definition Pt x Data BOOL Input Status lIndicates whether an input point is On or Off Connection Data or Listen Only 0 The input point is Off Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 1 The input point is
281. t dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARCFLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control center to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt gt Allen Bradley Rockwell Software and Rockwell Automation ControlLogix Logix5000 Studio 5000 Studio 5000 Logix Designer Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment Integrated Architecture Data Highway Plus and DH are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Topic Page Updated the Electronic Keying section 40 Updated the Attention text on RIUP support in the Install the Module section 107 Updated the MainTask tag name in Create a New Tag 212 Updated the use of the Browse button in the Communication Tab section 219 Updated Number of Motor Starters to be Used table 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058
282. t data only is established with the module This dedicated event connection reduces controller overhead when using inputs or input patterns to trigger event tasks in the controller e Anew set of event tags is created as described in Table 46 on page 191 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Features Specific to The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital output Fast Output Modules Bones Topic Page Programmable Fault State Delays 91 Pulse Width Modulation 93 Peer 1 0 Control 1756 0B16lEF only See the Peer 1 0 Control Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 0B16IEF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast output module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 Programmable Fault State Delays You can define the following states for an output point that is in Fault mode due to a communication failure e Duration Defines the length of time that the output remains in the Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off By default the
283. t turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and module is still faulted ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when the controller is in Program mode Output Data Scheduled per 0 Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag default Point 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached ProgValue BOOL Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the Connection Data corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared Output Data Scheduled per 0 The output state is Off during Program mode Point 1 The output state is On during Program mode FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains in the Connection Data Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode stateis Output Data Scheduled per defined in the FaultValue tag Point Valid values e 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault condition persists 1 2 5 0r 10 seconds PWM x Enable BOOL Enable PUM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current Connection Data PWM configuration Output Data Scheduled per 0 PWM is disabled
284. t you are sending a message to such as the device object or a discrete output point Object ID Instance Each object can have multiple instances For example a discrete output can have 16 points or instances of where a message can be sent This specifies the instance Object Attribute Attribute Further identifies the exact address for the message An analog input can have multiple alarms so this attribute acknowledges a specific alarm and not the other alarms If an attribute is not specified default to 0 the Service applies to all attributes of the Class Instance 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following table contains code information that is necessary only if you are configuring the message with RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier Table 57 Module Services and Configuration Information Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier Retrieve CST Retrieve Device Reset the Module Reset Latched Reset ElectronicFuse Pulse Test Information Information WHO Diagnostics Service Code 1 1 5 4b 4d 4c Object Type 77 1 1 1d Input modules le le 1e Output modules Object ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 Object Attribute N A N A N A N A N A N A Source N A N A N A Enable_32_ Points DINT Enable_32_Points DINT Pulse_Test_Paramete rs SINT 10 Number of Elements 0 0 0 4 4 10 bytes Destinat
285. tWorx for ControlNet software RSNetWorx software transfers configuration data to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network and establishes a network update time NUT for the ControlNet network that is compliant with the desired communication options specified for each module during configuration Anytime a controller references a scheduled connection to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network you must run RSNetWorx software to configure the ControlNet network Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Refer to the following general steps when configuring I O modules 1 Configure all I O modules for a given controller by using RSLogix 5000 software and download that information to the controller 2 Ifthe I O configuration data references a scheduled connection to a module in a remote chassis connected via the ControlNet network run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to schedule the network 3 After running RSNetWorx software perform an online save of the RSLogix 5000 project to make sure the configuration information that RSNetWorx software sends to the controller is saved IMPORTANT You must run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software whenever a new 1 0 module is added to a scheduled ControlNet chassis When a module is permanently removed from a remote chassis we recommend that you run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to reschedule the network an
286. ta Output continued Name Pt x PWMFaultValueStateDuration Data Type SINT Tag Definition Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains in the Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode state is defined in the FaultValue tag Valid values e 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault condition persists 1 2 5 0r 10 seconds Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns On e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is set the configured number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared the configured number of cycles occur only if the output remains On For example if the cycle limit is 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle does not occur The default cycle limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 per
287. ter 0 375 A 50 C 122 F 8 Confirm the 1756 0A161 A total module current can drive 11 size 3 motor starters 50 C 122 F 234 Motor starter steady state current x 11 motor starters 375 x 11 4 125A 50 C 122 F The output total module current can drive 5A 033 A x 20 C 5A 0 66 A 4 34 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F total output current derates to 033 mA C Module derating The 1756 0A16 total output current 4 34A can drive the 11 motor starters 4 125 A 50 C 122 F Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Appendix F Major Revision Upgrades Topic Page If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying 1 0 Configuration 236 If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 236 With the exception of fast digital I O modules catalog numbers 1756 IB16IF 1756 OBIGIEF and 1756 OBIGIEFS ControlLogix 1756 digital I O modules are transitioning to use a new internal backplane Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASIC chip As a result the Major Revision number for these modules has also been upgraded Digital I O modules with the new ASIC have Major Revision 3 x IMPORTANT Donotbackflash your modules firmware from firmware revision 3 x to 2 x Attempting to backflash or downgrade a modules firmware from 3 x to 2 x will irreversibly damage the module You must return modules damaged by an attempt to backflash to firmware 2 x to Rockwell Automation Mod
288. ter 1 time master that is controller Bit3 0 time not synced 1 time synced with master Size of timer in bits CST Information 10 CST Timer Size INT 2 Unused CST Information 12 CST reserved 8 WHO Information SINT 47 Device manufacturer s vendor ID 1 AB WHO Information 0 WHO vendor 2 INT Devices product type 7 Digital 1 0 WHO Information 2 WHO product type 2 INT Device catalog code which maps to its catalog number WHO Information 4 WHO catalog code 2 INT Devices major revision WHO Information 6 WHO major revision 1 SINT Devices minor revision WHO Information 7 WHO minor revision 1 SINT Device s internal status WHO_Information 8 WHO status 2 Bit 0 0 unowned 1 owned INT Bit 2 0 unconfigured 1 configured Bits 7 4 forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status For Digital 1 0 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communication fault 3 Not owned 4 Unused 5 Internal fault module needs to be flash updated 6 Run mode 7 Program mode N A for input modules Bit 8 0 no fault 1 Minor recoverable fault that is backplane error detected Bit 9 0 no fault 1 Minor non recoverable fault Bit 10 0 no fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 0 no fault 1 Major non recoverable fault that is module needs to be reflashed Bits 15 12 unused Device serial number WHO Information 10 WHO serial number 4 DINT Number of characters in the text string WHO In
289. ter If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Supersedes Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
290. th 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1 This IFM is not recommended for use with 1 0 modules that have an off state leakage current exceeding 0 5 mA Use a 1492 IFM20D120N or 1492 IFM20D120A 2 module for inputs Use a 1492 IFM20D120 2 module for outputs 2 The 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 module and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 IB16D module However due to the 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 modules blown fuse leakage current rating the wire off diagnostic function of the 1756 IB16D module does not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a wire off condition If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 IFM40F F24AD 4 module 3 Expandable to 16 by using a XIM120 BR or XIMF 24 2 module 4 Lan have up to 1 expandable module depending upon master used total 16 pts or less Extender cable is provided IFMs status indicator provides output On Off indication Due to the magnitude of current through the status indicator the 1756 0B16D module no load diagnostic function does not work If this function is required use the 1492 IFM40F
291. th housing 116 F fast 1 0 module array data structure 209 CIP Sync time 44 222 event task trigger 89 90 fault and status reporting 103 104 input module compatibility 79 output module compatibility 80 per point timestamping 83 85 programmable fault state delay 91 pulse capture 82 pulse width modulation 93 102 response time 81 software configurable filter times 86 88 251 fault latch 57 type 179 fault reporting diagnostic input modules 75 modules 66 output modules 77 fast input modules 103 output modules 104 standard input modules 60 modules 39 output modules 61 features common 37 62 diagnostic 63 78 digital 1 0 modules 134 fast 79 104 field power loss detection 1756 0A8E module 56 70 field power loss word diagnostic input modules 76 output modules 78 standard output modules 62 flat data structure 209 Full Diagnostic Input Data communication format 128 Full Diagnostics communication format 129 fuse blown word diagnostic output modules 78 104 standard output modules 62 fusing electronic 53 housing options 116 IFM See interface module Input Data communication format 128 install 1 0 module assemble RTB 115 connect wires 110 extended depth housing 116 insert into chassis 108 install RTB 118 key RTB 109 interface module 14 internal module operation 21 K keying mechanical 16 Removable Terminal Block RTB 109 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 latch fault 57 pul
292. the Enable Diag Latching column e To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods e Reset Diagnostic Latch service e Software reset during online monitoring e Cycling power to the module s Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Modules Properties screen click the Diagnostics tab R Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Reset Point Latched Diagnostics Ree Reset Res Reset Fest Fest Fesat Ress Reset Status Running 0 1 2 3 4 5 B i 8 9 2 Click Reset next to the point for which to reset a latched fault 3 Click OK Diagnostic Timestamp Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when it clears This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in running applications Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a local controller to generate timestamps To use diagnostic timestamps you must choose the appropriate communication format during initial configuration For more information see To configure features specific to fast modules see Chapter 5 on page 130
293. thin that time period the input never remains On for at least 2 ms The module considers the transition invalid and drops the data timestamped at the original transition Figure 10 on page 87 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Figure 8 Valid Transition with No Bounce e Input remains On for at least 2 ms The transition is considered valid and the timestamp is sent to the controller Input turns On and a timestamp is recorded Time in milliseconds Figure 9 Transition Valid with Bounce Input turns On and remains On for at least 2 ms in the 20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter time The module sends the timestamp recorded at the original transition point time 0 to the controller Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses Input turns On and a timestamp is recorded Time in milliseconds Figure 10 Invalid Transition The input never remains l On for at least 2 ms After the 20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses time the module drops the data recorded at the original transition If an RPI occurs during this time On and the module sends the controller its current valid input nput tums 9n ane d data The data that is sent does not include data from b timestamp is recorded the transition because the input transition has not cleared the filter and been recognized as a valid i
294. tion ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without first being polled by a controller The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example an input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For more information about this process see Input Module Operation on page 26 Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix digital I O module has a status indicator on the front of the module that lets you check the health and operational status of a module The status indicator displays vary for each module Status Description 1 0 status This yellow display indicates the On Off state of the field device ST IMPORTANT For the 1756 0A8D and 1756 OA8E modules the 1 0 status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status OK Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of various FLT faults Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the Fuse module s fuse See Appendix A for examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix digital input modules Topic Page Data
295. tion 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 95 Chapter5 bast Module Features Figure 14 PWM Cyde Limit Output Logic Output State Only 2 cycles are executed even The cyde limit restarts when the output begins pulsing though the output logic remains On on the next rising edge of output logic If the output logic turns Off before the cycle limit is reached you can configure the pulse cycles to continue until the cycle limit is reached by enabling the Execute All Cycles option Figure 15 shows a cycle limit of 2 with the Execute All Cycles option enabled Figure 15 PWM Cyde Limit with Execute All Cycles Option Output Logic Output State Pd Both cycles are executed even though the output logic turned Off before the cycle limit was reached Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output The Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output configuration options are useful in time proportional control applications such as temperature control In these applications PID calculations compare the actual temperature to the desired setpoint and vary the PWM On time to a heating element in real time to regulate temperature as it approaches the setpoint as shown in Figure 16 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Figure 16 PWM for Time Proportioned Control Heated Vessel Variable PWM On Time from PID Calculation Temperature Feedback to Analog Input Rockwell Auto
296. uc i B 4d ex 2 Slot4 Ch Reset Fuse ype Service Code Hex Source Ch Reset DI RTT Object Type fe Hex Nun Of Elements 1 Bytes Bewice 4d Hex Class fie HEX Destination SI Object ID Destination Locak4 C Instance 1 Attribute o Hex Nesom Object Attribute Hex Create Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 O Error Code Timed Out Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Qut Error Path Extended Error Code Error Text Cancel Am nee aK ce Ae Help The following table explains the relationship of the fields in the above dialog boxes For example despite different entry fields both screen examples are configured to send a message to reset an electronic fuse module service on Channel 0 ofa 1756 OA8D module where to perform the service Table 56 Relationship of Message Configuration Parameters RSLogix 5000 Version 9 00 00 or RSLogix 5000 Version 10 07 00 or Description Earlier Later Service Code Service Type Defines the type of module service to be performed For example a reset Note In version 10 07 00 or later you can use a pull down menu to choose the Service Type The software defaults the Service Code Instance Class and Attribute parameters based on the Service Type that you choose All values are in Hex Object Type Class Object tha
297. ue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue DINT Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgMode 0 Off 1 0n ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure 1 byte per module 184 occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if a communication failure occurs 1 Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Tag Definitions Appendix B Table 38 Standard Output Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing see BlownFuse 8 bytes NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data DINT Data Off On status for the output point echoed back from the output module This is used to verify proper 1 bit per point communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault This is an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and 1 0 data for that point may be incorrect 1
298. ules and other system devices in which each module produces data without first being polled System time stamp of data A 64 hit system clock places a time stamp on the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities to help you effectively and efficiently use your module and troubleshoot your application Agency Certification Class 1 Division 2 agency certification for any application that requires approval Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 13 Chapter1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Modules in the ControlLogix System 14 ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and require either a removable terminal block RTB or a Bulletin 1492 wiring interface module EM to connect all field side wiring Before you install and use your module you must do the following e Install and ground a 1756 chassis and power supply To install these products refer to the publications listed in For More Information on page 12 e Order and receive an RTB or IFM and its components for your application IMPORTANT RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase See page 112 for RTBs and page 237 for IFMs Table 1 ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Cat No Description Page 1756
299. ules with the new internal backplane ASIC are form fit functional equivalents to the 2 x modules You can use Major Revision 3 x modules as direct replacements for Major Revision 2 x modules in these cases e The electronic keying of the module is specified as Compatible or Disabled Keying e The electronic keying of the module is Exact Keying then additional steps are required See page 236 for details The use of the upgraded ASIC also impacts the firmware revisions that can be flash upgraded to the module Digital I O modules at Major Revision 3 x cannot be backflashed to any 2 x firmware revision Digital I O modules at firmware revision 2 xcannot be flash upgraded to any firmware revision 3 x Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 235 AppendixF Major Revision Upgrades If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying 1 0 Configuration If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 236 If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and have configured the 2 x module to use Compatible or Disabled Keying further steps are not required If you use Compatible or Disabled Keying configurations 3 x modules can be used as a direct replacements for 2 xmodules If you are currently using a 2 x module configured at Exact Match keying consider changing the module s electronic keying in the I O configuration to Compatible or Disabled Keying If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and must use Ex
300. ur terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 9 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 6 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1756 0B16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard ee 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM2024 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 24V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0B16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1756 0B16IEF 1756 0B16IEFS 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four
301. vior when the value in the PWM OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM MinimunOnTime configuration tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On time the output remains Off and the cycle does not extend Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by staggering On transitions for outputs Otherwise outputs turn On immediately at the start of a cycle Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Does not stagger output On transitions default Outputs turn On immediately when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a ri
302. ware for Troubleshooting 178 Fault Type Determination qe us gsc e e 179 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Tag Definitions Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Choose a Correct Power Supply Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules Major Revision Upgrades 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules History of Changes Table of Contents Appendix B Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags sees ese 181 Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags sese sese 184 Fast Input Module Tags sese 187 Past Output Module Tags sese 192 1756 OBIGIEF Module eR 192 1756 OBIGIEFS Module eee 200 Array Data SEFUCLB R voa dat cde Meme yaa dut a dteteodexrius tid oa ya 209 Appendix C Using Message Instructions c5 eesuce voce de aal s NU e oHG 211 Processing Real time Control and Module Services 212 One Service Performed Per Instruction 212 Created New Tag rra aR ores RER RENE REPE TR ARUM 212 Enter Message Gonfigutatiofiy e ios oer reo V yen S enF T Ee 215 Configuration Tab cocus oer vepr E e RE eet Oeo PELLI e 216 Communication Tab seen 219 Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Standard and Diagnostic I O Modules ss 220 Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Fast I O Modules eese 222 Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test and Reset Latched Diagnostics s de esoxer beso
303. well Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 1756 0B16IEFS Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V scheduled electronically protected sinking or sourcing isolated fast output module implifi i 1756 OB161EFS Isolated Sourcing Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring Output Wiring DC 0 DC 0 4 O DC 0 1 4 out o O DCO J DC 1 ay OUT 1 Isolator C 2 C s DC 2 o DCL Qs 5 OUT 2 o DC2 DC 3 Cp 7E ours M K DC 4 z IT 98 QUT 4 OUT 0 Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 He MET OUT 5 lt 8 o DC6 7 b el Fault CD SMS 9a aT Ours o DC6 Display ControlLogix DC 7 16 158 OUT7 Backplane Jumper Bar DC 8 ahs 17 Ours Interface Cut to Length DC 9 alo g OUT 9 DC 10 4 gz ag OUT 10 DC S Uti Surge Current Chart Nonisolated M TaD lee z BUM Nonisolated Wiring DC 12 z 25 0D OUT 12 Sourcing Surge DC 13 a 28 27 g OUT13 e Output 4A DC 14 ym 29 OUT 14 Wiring DC AS H Tapa sig OUTS __y 4 c Continuous 2 A 45 C 113 F D o DCR 34 33 ot Used g 2A pd ot Use CDiss as ot Used O 3 DCI Continuous 1 A 60 C 140 F l 1A L
304. witches e Limit switches e Selector switches e Float switches e Push button switches When designing systems with ControlLogix input modules consider these factors e Voltage necessary for your application e Current leakage e Whether you need a solid state device e Whether your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 37 Chapter 3 Common Module Features Output Module Compatibility ControlLogix output modules can be used to drive a variety of output devices 38 Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include these items e Motor starters e Solenoids e Indicators Follow these guidelines when designing a system e Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation s Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads refer to the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device The ControlLogix standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix standard digital inputs The exceptions are the AC and DC diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For information on the compatibility of motor starters with ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E
305. with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120 2 120V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F120 2 Extra terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F F240 2 Extra terminals with 240V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM20120 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM20120 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 120V AC relays 1492 XIM20120 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 120V AC relays with fusing 1492 XIM120 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 120V AC relays 9 1492 XIMF F120 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 120V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0A161 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output RAMIS 1492 IFM40 FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40 FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1756 0B8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard E 1492 IMF20F 2 Extra terminals 14
306. wrLoss 0 No fault 1 Fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 183 AppendixB Tag Definitions Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags ControlLogix standard and diagnostic digital output modules have three types of tags e Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup e Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module e Output Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the I O module that can modify the module behavior IMPORTANT Thetable lists all possible standard or diagnostic output module tags In each application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Table 37 Standard Output Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition FaultMode DINT Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1bit per point See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue DINT Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1 bit per point See FaultMode 0 Off 1 0n ProgMode DINT Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgVal
307. ws examples of the tags created in the ladder logic as displayed in the tag editor Scope Pulse Fuse exampk Show Show All 7 Sot Tag Name p TesNane Mesfa Base Tag npe eye 7 Deseibien MESSAGE HH Slot4 B fuse reset MESSAGE reset_slt4_b1 DINT Binary reset_slt4_b0 DINT Decimal Pulse_test_slot4_b0 MESSAGE pulse_slt4_b0 DINT 5 Binary m FE pulse results slt DINT 1 Decimal E 7 Pluse_Results_Slot4 DINT 1 Binary Local AB 1756 DI DC i Local 9 C B 1755 DI DC E Local 8 1 B 1755 DI Time ER E Local gC 4B 1756_D1 C 0 E cH Local 7 0 4B 1756_D0 0 0 oo Monitor Tags Edit Tags Ia fy Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and status through a WHO service In this application a message instruction retrieves the following module identification information Product type Product code Major revision Minor revision Status Vendor Serial number String length ASCII string A full explanation of each module identification category is provided after the ladder logic application IMPORTANT The ladder logic example in this section uses a user defined WHO data structure and a series of Copy instruct
308. x 0rToPeerWindow0 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership Sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from window 0 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow0 e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer Corresponding bits from window 1 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow1 e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership sources Corresponding bits from window 1 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow1 Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Output Data Data with Peer 195 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 No fault per Module 1
309. x Firmware delay 13 us nom 21 us max User configurable filter time 0 30 000 ps Table 17 Output Response Time Delay Response Time Total On Off delay screw to backplane 14 us nom 23 yis max Hardware delay lt 1 ys nom 2 US max Firmware delay 13 us nom 21 us max The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital input modules Topic Page Pulse Capture 82 Per Point Timestamping and Change of State 83 Software Configurable Filter Times 86 Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks 89 IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 IB16IF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast input module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 81 Chapter 5 82 Fast Module Features Pulse Capture The 1756 IB16IF fast input module can be used to detect or latch short duration pulses The module can detect incoming pulses with a duration as short as 10 us if the frequency is under 4 kHz period of 250 us When the module detects a short duration pulse at an input point it sets the correspond
310. x Backplane Interface 4A 2A Current 156 Output Device Surge Current Chart Surge 0 10 ms Time 1756 0B8l DC 0 2 Isolated OUT 0 Wiring 2 E OUT 0 2 RIN OUT 0 Nonisolated Wiring Continuous 60 C 140 F ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module 1756 0BI Daisy Chainto Other c RIBs Daisy Chainto Other RTBs z e c z e 2 j c 2 j c z e c 2 e c 2 e c T T T E S3 RN Mom c l to 10 9 T 12 11 T 14 13 16 15 18 17 E 20 18 22 21 T 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 eee 3 2 29 DI erem GO O P O G GH O O O 36 35 c cuc C C C mdr orm dorm er e rS erm eer Mo Mer era erm Mer Oo O00 0 E G GRA KA gt gt 00 E 9 G 9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C9 G C9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C OUT 7 Not Used Not Used Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0B16D ControlLogix DC 19 2 30V diagnostic output module Simplified schematic DC Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0B16D Short Circuit L ba 5V 45V Detect s our Optoisolation k Ou OU OU OU OU OU OU
311. xta ob ocv a rep a amatus Key the Removable Terminal Black Connect the YU Iesus Sos velum cea shut Ardea du E etu date RID Types konani RR eq hated du E aE Pama RIB Wiring Recommendations coro eru rer e hanes Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing Choose Extended depth Housing i eerte Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing Install the Removable Terminal Block seuusu Remove the Removable Terminal Black cece neues Remove the Module from the Chassis Chapter 7 Configuration Process Overview scere isa quere tai P ses Create a New Module Ss caicuiiads 3s EE ER NETS PRSE Communication or Connection Formats lt e e e ee eee Edit the Configuration see e Connection Properties was a Hie er OU HIDE EE RAI View and Change Module Tags sese Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Table of Contents Chapter 8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 D 8D n asec elects eee bU E DEOR ISP ES 135 175698 LAT O cuin a a ee RR eres ae OPI VE d uad aen 135 1756 TATO 2455903385885 wes OR REO RIRMOIRON SENE 125 eee 136 pr tr 137 1756 lR orent Be eerte tacitae ai eremi suns 138 1756 IB16D t c queat Oe tS IO S TEES 139 PESO IDOL ic oce epdetut rette i tt atts a Ne etr E E ood 140 756 IBI6I P he eth DA edu elt Mta aca een 141 1756 B32 ar Kea A e be R dude oed tu ERET 142 1756 16 16 screw e xe Rene a pese Ro qe PHOT 143 17561
312. y indicates a blown fuse is possible Detect a No Load condition No Load detection can only detect a fault when an output point is in the Off state with an output On However you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an On state to determine whether operating conditions for a point may cause a No Load condition If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the On state the output point is commanded to be Off briefly The pulse test reports a failure because conditions when the point is Off indicate the possible absence of a field device in this case though the No Load bit is not set See Point level Fault Reporting on page 66 IMPORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load It merely indicates a No Load condition is possible Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic output module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in the table occurs Table 11 Diagnostic Change of State Events Description Receipt of output data Output module sends data when it echoes back to the owner controller Diagnostic change of state Output module sends data when any change in the diagnostics output point occurs Unlike diagnostic input modules this feature cannot be disabled for diagnosti
313. y using catalog number 1756 JMPR GND 4 HE 30 la N 14 o o GND 15 TED 32 si ID N 15 o 0 9 DC o __ GND 15 E ss CD Not Used Lg DC 4 Not Used 36 35 ID Not Used 5 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Simplified Schematic Current Limiter Nx o m Opto isolator Display Y 2 l E V ControlLogix Backplane Interface GND x c Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 141 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1B32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 1B32 IN 0 Current Limiter i N3 a a as t N 5 GND 0 Z E Group 0 N 7 Daisy Chain GND gt y E i to Other RTBs i 3 N 15 elfe es ooga ControlLogix Display Backplane Interface N47 N 19 N 21 23 N 25 N 27 N 29 N 31 GND 1 Group 1 isis s ogo DC COM 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058H EN P May 2015 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 1C16 ControlLogix DC 30 60V input module 1756 1C16 Simplified Schematic 22 5V IN 0 a I1 GND 0 F Yast Kd 1 m M GND gt Controllogix Display Backplane Interface

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents